~ Iltt~ Care...unless otherwise indicated; and A WS AS.S, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSDlO.12

WRIGHT AND HAMMER ARCHITECTS

ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE

FOR THE HOM E L E S S I INC.

~ I~~~~ltt~~~~~ FIRST STREET

CAMPUS EXPANSION 1 220 FIRST STREET

(FIRST STREET AND MOUNTAIN ROAD)

RFP NUMBER AHCH 14-001

PROPOSAL DUE DATE OCTOBER 28, 2014

VOLUME III OF III DIVISION 21 THRU 32

SEPTEMBER 26[ 2014

1 735 A LIS 0 DR I V E. N. E. ALB U QUE R QUE, NEW ME X leo 8 7 1 1 0 (505) 2 66- 6764

DIVISION 21.

21 0500 21 1100 21 1313

DIVISION 22.

220500 220519 220529 220700 22 1113 22 1116 22 1119 22 1313 22 1316 22 1413 22 1423 223400 224000 224700

DIVISION 23.

230500 230593 230700 230800 230900 23 1123 232300 233113 233300 233713 237200

INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUMN III OF III

FIRE SUPPRESSION

Common Work Results For Fire Suppression Facility Fire Suppression Water Service Piping Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems

PLUMBING

Common Work Results for Plumbing Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Plumbing Insulation Facility Water Distribution Piping Domestic Water Piping Domestic Water Piping Specialties Facility Sanitary Sewers Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Facility Storm Drainage Piping Facility Storm Drainage Specialties Hot Water Heater Plumbing Fixtures Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers

. HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Common Work Results for HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC HVAC Insulation Mechanical Systems Commissioning Requirements Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Facility Natural-Gas Piping Refrigerant Piping Ductwork Air Duct Accessories Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Air To Air Energy Recovery System

1

DIVISION 26.

260500 260519 260526 260529 260533 260553 262416 262726 263100 265100 265600

DIVISION 31.

31 0000 31 1000 31 2316

DIVISION 32.

321216 32 1313 32 1373 323000 328400 328405 329200

DIVISION 33. NOT USED

ELECTRICAL

Common Work Results for Electrical Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Identification for Electrical Systems Panelboards Wiring Devices Solar PV Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting

EARTHWORK

Earthwork Site Clearing Excavation Support and Protection

EXTEruORIMPROVEMENTS

Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Cement Concrete Pavement Pavement Joint Sealants Site Equipment Irrigation Rainwater Harvesting Systems Planting

UTILITIES

2

ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE FOR THE HOMELESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

SECTION 21-0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

1.3

A. This Section includes the following:

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages.

DEFINITIONS

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 050()'1


1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrili>-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

I. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6

1.7

A. Steel Support Welding: QualifY processes and operators according to A WS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: QualifY processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

C.

A.

B.

A.

B.

c.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. CertifY that each welder has passed A WS qualification tests for welding processes involved

and that certification is current.

Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end d\lmage and to prevent entrance of diIi, debris, and moisture.

Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

COORDINATION

Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are. specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500-2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

2.3

A.

A.

B.

A.

MANUFACTURERS

In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

JOINING MATERIALS

Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B 16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, liS-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. A WWA CliO, rubber, flat face, liS inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B IS.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB S13.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS.S, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and A WS AS.S, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSDlO.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTMF 493.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21050()'3


2.4

A.

MEC~CALSLEEVESEALS

Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

2.6

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

E.

F.

G.

A.

B.

C.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

ESCUTCHEONS

Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ill to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.


ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE fOR THE HOMELESS fiRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

E.

F.

G.

H.

2.7

A.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated

One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, chrome-plated finish.

One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

GROUT

Description: ASTMC 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: SOOO-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

B.

FIRE- SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION

Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to b~ removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean,

and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.



C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass

type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped

steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. . g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type, stamped-steel type and set screw. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished

chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. I. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed exposed hinge and

spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast

brass type with chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped

steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type

with chrome-plated finish.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 050(}'6


f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated rough-brass finish.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips. k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board pmiitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with . membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for

pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make wateliight seal.



3.3

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1- inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

S.

T.

U.

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

F.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTMB 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ill. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. WeIded Joints: Construct joints according to A WS D 1 0.12, using qualified processes and welding ~perators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTMF 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.


ALBUQUERQUE HEAL TH,CARE FOR THE HOMElESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

J.

A.

B.

A.

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846ID 2846M Appendix.

Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTMD 3139.

PAINTING

Painting of fire- suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

CONCRETE BASES

Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on I8-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section" Cast- in-Place Concrete".

ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor firesuppression materials and equipment.

Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 050()'9


3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 21 0500



SECTION 211100 -

FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components outside the building.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

C. Not Used

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

D. Field quality-control repOlts.


1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100 - 1


D. Comply with the "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.


ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE FOR THE HOMElESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A C 151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.

B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end.

C. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end.

D. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. ShUljoint Piping Products. c. Star Pipe Products. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

E. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or A WWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: A WW A C 111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

F. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Gaskets: A WWA Clll, rubber.

G. Flanges: ASMEBI6.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, Fire-Service Pipe: FM Global approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to Class 150.

B. Molded PE Fittings: FM Global approved; PE butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class.

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:




a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. ROMAC Industries Inc. c. Star Pipe Products.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA ClIO or A WWA CI53. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include A WW A CIII, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and one or two flexing sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWACII0 or AWWAC153. Include AWWAClll, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.


2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Gaskets for Ferrous Piping and Copper-Alloy Tubing: ASME B16.21, asbestos free.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Division. d. JCM Industries. e. ROMAC Industries Inc.



f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners, and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined.

3. Standard: A WWA C219. 4. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 6. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. 7. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.6 GA TE VALVES

A. A WWA Gate Valves:


a. American A VK Company; Valves & Fittings Division. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; American Flow Control Division. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. d. American RID. e. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. h. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. i. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. k. NIBCO INC. 1. Tyler Pipe; a division of McWane, Inc.; Utilities Division. m. U.S. Pipe.

2. 200-psig, A WWA, Iron, Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

b. Standard: A WWA C500. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Mechanical joint. e. Interior Coating: Complying with A WW A C550.

3. 200-psig, A WWA, Iron, Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

b. Standard: A WWA C509. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Mechanical or push-on joint. e. Interior Coating: Complying with A WW A C550.

FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WA TER-SERVICE PIPING 211100 - 5


4. 200-psigAWWA, Iron, OS&Y, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.

b. Standard: A WWA CSOO. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

S. 200-psig, A WWA, Iron, OS&Y, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze, gray-iron, or ductile-iron gate; resilient seats; and bronze stem.

b. Standard: A WW A CS09. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

6. 2S0-psig, A WWA, Iron, OS&Y, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- 01' ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze, gray-iron, or ductile-iron gate; resilient seats; and bronze stem.

b. Standard: A WWA CS09. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

7. Class 12S, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Class 12S, Type 1; bronze with solid wedge and malleable-iron handwheel.

b. Standard: MSS SP-80. c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig. d. End Connections: Solder joint 01' threaded.

B. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. American A VK Company; Valve & Fittings Division. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; American Flow Control Division. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. h. Hammond Valve. i. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. j. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. k. Milwaukee Valve Company. 1. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. m. NIBCO INC.



2.7

A.

n. ShUljoint Piping Products. o. Troy Valve; a division of Penn-Troy Manufacturing, Inc. p. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. q. United Brass Works, Inc. r. U.S. Pipe. s. Watts Water Technologies, Inc

2. 175-psig, UL-Listed or FM-Approved, Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet, bronze seating material, and inside screw. b. Standards: UL 262 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. c. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. d. End Connections: Mechanical or push-on joint. e. Indicator-Post Flange: Include on valves used with indicator posts.

3. 250-psig (UL-Listed or FM-Approved, Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet, bronze seating material, and inside screw. b. Standards: UL 262 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. c. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. d. End Connections: Mechanical or push-on j oint. e. Indicator-Post Flange: Include on valves used with indicator posts.

4. 175-psig, UL-Listed or FM-Approved, Iron, OS&Y, Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material. b. Standards: UL 262 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. c. Pressure Rating: 175 psig) minimum. d. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

GA TE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIAL TIES

Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

1. : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. d. Flowserve. e. Kelmedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. f. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. h. U.S. Pipe.

3. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. 4. Standard: MSS SP-60.



5. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron, ductile-iron, or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve shall match size and type of pipe material being tapped and have recessed flange for branch valve.

6. Valve: A WWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal seated gate valve with one raised-face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with A WWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel; with tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts:


a. American A VK Company; Valves & Fittings Division. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; American Flow Control Division. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. f. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. h. NIBCO INC. L Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Description: Vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel oflength required for depth of burial of valve.

3. Standards: UL 789 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2.8 CHECK VALVES

A. A WW A Check Valves:


a. American A VK Company; Valves & Fittings Division. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; American Flow Control Division. c. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. h. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. L Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. j. NIBCO INC.



k. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. >.

2. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat; with interior coating according to A WWA C550 and ends to match piping.

3. Standard: A WWA C508. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

B. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Check Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. f. Kidde Fire Fighting. g. Matco-Norca. h. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. i. NIB CO INC. j. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. k. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 1. United Brass Works, Inc. m. Victaulic Company. n. Viking Corporation. o. Watts Water Technologies, Inc ..

2. Description: Swing-check type with pressure rating, rubber-face checks unless otherwise indicated, and ends matching piping.

3. Standards: UL 312 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

2.9 DETECTOR CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Badger Meter, Inc. 3. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. 4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 5. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. 6. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters Division. 7. Victaulic Company. 8. Viking Corporation. 9. Watts Water Technologies, Inc ..



C.

D.

E.

F.

2.10

A.

Description: Galvanized cast-iron body, bolted cover with air-bleed device for access to internal parts, and flanged ends. Include one-piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required.

Standards: UL 312 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

Water Meter: A WW A C700, disc type, at least one-fourth size of detector check valve. Include meter, bypass piping, gate valves, check valve, and connections to detector check valve.

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Division.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.

B. Backflow Preventer Test Kits:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Division.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and canying case with testprocedure instructions.

2.11 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS




B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

2.12

A.

B.

C.

D.

2.13

A.

B.

1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. 2. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. 3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 4. Kidde Fire Fighting. 5. Potter Roemer. 6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

Description: Freestanding, with cast-bronze body, thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch- high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate.

Standard: UL 405.

Connections: Per local fire department..

Inlet Alignment: Inline.

Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome plated.

Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR."

ALARM DEVICES

General: UL 753 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.

Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig working pressure; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-Vac and 0.25 A, 24-V de; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed.

Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position.

Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.

SLEEVES

Cast-Iron Wall-Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-111111) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard-weight, zinc-coated, plain ends.



2.14 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

2.15 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with water utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.



D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

E. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTMF 645.

H. Install PVC, A WW A pipe according to ASTM F 645 and A WW A M23.

1. Install fiberglass A WWA pipe according to A WW A M45.

J. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches of cover over top.

K. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

L. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping at building floor slab until buildingwater-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building'S fire-suppression waterservice piping systems when those systems are installed.

M. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.

E. Remove scale, slag, ditt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Copper-Tubing, Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.



3.4

G. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.

H. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.

J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.

K. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

L. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to A WWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139.

M. Fiberglass Piping Bonded Joints: Use adhesive and procedure recommended by piping manufacturer.

N. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure.

O. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

VAL VE INST ALLA TION

A WW A Gate Valves: Comply with A WW A C600 and A WW A M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with A WWA C600 imd AWWA M44.

UL-Listed or FM-Approved Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

UL-Listed or FM-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves.]

Support valves and piping, not direct buried, on concrete piers

3.5 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install in vault or aboveground.



3.6

3.7

3.8

B.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

B.

A.

Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.

BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment.

Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.

FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire-department connection to mains.

Install protective pipe bollards on two sides of each fire-<iepartment connection. Pipe bollards are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."

ALARM DEVICE INST ALLA TION

General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.

1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke.

2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.

B. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows:

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS& Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.

C. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.

D. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.

E. Connect alarm devices to building's fire-alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are specified in Division 28 Sections.



3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to utility water main.

B. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.

3.10 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in exterior walls.

1. Exception: Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

C. Install sleeves in new floor slabs as they are constructed.

D. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeves and piping using \joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. \

3.11 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete floor slabs at fire-suppression water-service piping entries into the building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described below.

B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times the working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psig Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic fire-suppression waterservice piping or fire-suppression water-service piping with electrically insulated fittings, on main electrical meter panel. Comply with requirements for identifying devices in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of con~amination.

END OF SECTION 211100





SECTION 21 1313

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2

1.3

1.4


A.

B.

A.

B.

A.

B.

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Fire-department connections. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Excess-pressure pumps. 6. Alarm devices. 7. Manual control stations. 8. Control panels. 9. Pressure gages.

Related Sections:

1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for standpipe piping.

DEFINITIONS

High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than 250 psig.

Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.

Deluge Sprinkler System: Open sprinklers are attached to piping connected to water supply through deluge valve. Fire-detection system, in same area as sprinklers, opens valve. Water flows into piping system and discharges from attached sprinklers when valve opens.

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313-1


1.5

1.6

A.

B.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Available fire-hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions:

a. Date: <Insert test date>. b. Time: <Insert time> [a.m.] [p.m.] c. Performed by: <Insert operator's name> of <Insert firm>. d. Location of Residual Fire Hydrant R: <Insert location>. e. Location of Flow Fire Hydrant F: <Insert location>. f. Static Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: <Insert psig>. g. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant F: <Insert gpm>. h. Residual Pressure at Residual Fire Hydrant R: <Insert psig>.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

A.

B.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: per NFP A 13

Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping sl)all withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFP A 13.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,' sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including printed statement ofVOC content and chemical components.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers ofthe items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. Compressed air piping. 3. HV AC hydronic piping. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313-2


1.7

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer

O. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

H. Welding certificates.

I. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

J. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

K.

L.

A.

Field quality-control repOlis.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire -hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: QualifY procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

l. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including

Four Stories in Height." 3. NFPA24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, and paliition assemblies.

1.1 0 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFP A 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

PIPING MATERIALS

Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

Standard Weight, Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

Schedule 30, Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTMA 135; ASTMA 795/A 795M, or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

Thinwall Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTMA 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTMA 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

Nonstandard OD, Thinwall Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, thinwall, with plain ends and wall thickness less than Schedule 10.

Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with wall thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5.

Schedule 5 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Iightwall, with plain ends.



2.3

H. Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/ A 53M, standardweight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

1. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

J. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASMEBI6.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

K. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

L. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

M. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME BI6.5, Class 150.

N. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME BI6.9.

O. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. National Fittings, Inc. d. Shurjoint Piping Products. e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

P. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.

A.

B.

c.

D.


a. Victaulic Company.

COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Land ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.18, pressure fittings.

Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.22, pressure fittings.

Bronze Flanges: ASME BI6.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.



2.4

E. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metalto-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings:


a. Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. 4. NPS 2-112 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

G. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Shurjoint Piping Products. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTMB 75, copper tube or ASTMB 584, bronze castings. 3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design similar to

A WWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

H. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:

A.

B.


a. T -DRILL Industries Inc.

2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.

CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

CPVC Pipe: ASTMF 442/F 442M and UL 1821, SDR 13.5, for 175-psig rated pressure at 150 deg F, with plain ends. Include "LISTED" and "CPVC SPRINKLER PIPE" markings.

CPVC Fittings: UL listed or FM approved, for 175-psig rated pressure at 150 degF, socket type. Include "LISTED" and "CPVC SPRINKLER FITTING" markings.

1. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-112: ASTM F 438 and UL 1821, Schedule 40, socket type. 2. NPS 2 to NPS 3: ASTM F 439 and UL 1821, Schedule 80, socket type. 3. CPVC-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC, one piece, with dimensions equivalent to pipe;

one end with threaded brass insert, and one socket end. 4. CPVC-to-Metal Transition Unions: CPVC, with dimensions equivalent to pipe; one end with

threaded brass inseli, and one socket end. 5. Flanges: CPVC, one or two pieces.



2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

2.6

2.7

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA ClIO, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick ASME BI6.2I, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. 2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME BI8.2.I, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS DIO.I2M/DIO.l2 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of st~el pipe being welded.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493, solvent cement recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe and fittings. Include cleaner or primer recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer.

F.

A.

1. Use solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 650 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, and Bolts and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. DecoShield Systems, Inc.

B. Description: System of support brackets and covers made to protect sprinkler piping.

C. Brackets: Glass-reinforced nylon.

D. Covers: Extruded PVC sections of length, shape, and size required for size and routing of CPVC piping.

LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VAL YES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig 300 psig.

B. Ball Valves:




2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one of the following:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company.

3. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. 4. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and' Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 5. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-112: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with

grooved ends. 6. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to c<;>mpliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Fivalco Inc. b. Global Safety Products, Inc. c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

3. Standard: UL 1091. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 5. Body Material: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Threaded.

D. Iron Butterfly Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by oneofthe following:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Fivalco Inc. c. Global Safety Products, Inc. d. Kennedy Valve; a division ofMcWane, Inc. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Pratt, Henry Company. h. Shurjoint Piping Products. i. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. j. Victaulic Company.

3. Standard: UL 1091. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 5. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 6. Style: Lug or wafer. 7. End Connections: Grooved.

E. Check Valves:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one ofthe following:

a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Clow Valve Company; a division ofMcWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. h. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. i. Fire Protection Products, Inc. j. Fivalco Inc. k. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 1. Groeniger & Company. m. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. n. Matco-Norca. o. Metraflex, Inc. p. Milwaukee Valve Company. q. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. r. NIBCO INC. s. Potter Roemer. t. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. u. Shurjoint Piping Products. v. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. w. United Brass Works, Inc. x. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. y. Victaulic Company. z. Viking Corporation. aa. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

3. Standard: UL 312. 4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum 300 psig. 5. Type: Swing check. 6. Body Material: Cast iron. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings product by one of the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves:. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. United Brass Works, Inc.

3. Standard: UL 262. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 5. Body Material: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Threaded.



G. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division ofMcWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. Hammond Valve. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. j. NIBCO INC. k. Shurjoint Piping Products. \. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. m. United Brass Works, Inc. n. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

3. Standard: UL 262. 4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum 300 psig. 5. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

H. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:



a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Fivalco Inc. c. Global Safety Products, Inc. d. Kennedy Valve; a division ofMcWane, Inc. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Shurjoint Piping Products. h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. i. Victaulic Company.

3. Standard: UL 1091. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 5. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. b. Body Material: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded.

6. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

a. Valve Type: Butterfly.



2.8

b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

7. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch indicating device.

I. NRS Gate Valves:



a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division ofMcWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. g. NIBCO INC. h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3. Standard: UL 262. 4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum 300 psig. 5. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange. 6. Stem: Nonrising. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

J. Indicator Posts:

A.


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division ofMcWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. g. NIBCO INC. h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3. Standard: UL 789. 4. Type: Horizontal for wall mounting. 5. Body Material: Cast iron with extension rod and locking device. 6. Operation: Wrench.

TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

General Requirements:



1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.


B. Angle Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc. b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:

D.

l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Affiliated Distributors. b. Anvil International, Inc. c. Barnett. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. f. Fire Protection Products, Inc. g. Flowserve. h. FNW. i. Jomar International, Ltd. j. Kennedy Valve; a division ofMcWane, Inc. k. Kitz Corporation. \. Legend Valve. m. Metso Automation USA Inc. n. Milwaukee Valve Company. o. NIBCOINC. p. Potter Roemer. q. Red- White Valve Corporation. r. Southern Manufacturing Group. s. Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd. t. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. u. Victaulic Company. v. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

Globe Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc. b. United Brass Works, Inc. c.

E. Plug Valves:


a. Southern Manufacturing Group.



2.9

A.

SPECIAL TY VAL YES

General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory"listing or "Approval G.uide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating:

a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum. b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum 300 psig.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

B. Alarm Valves:



a. AFACInc. b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. f. Victaulic Company. g. Viking Corporation.

3. Standard: UL 193. 4. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation. S. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding

chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer. 6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping. 7. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

C. Deluge Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one ofthe following:

a. AFAC Inc. b. BERMAD Control Valves. c. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves. d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. OCV Control Valves. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. h. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. i. Victaulic Company. j. Viking Corporation.

WET·PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 1313·13


3. Standard: UL 260. 4. Design: Hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type. 5. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, drip cup

assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, fill-line attachment with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection.

6. Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber pressure, globe valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and connection for actuation device.

D. Automatic Ball Drip Drain Valves:

2.10

A.



a. AFAC Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3. Standard: UL 1726. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 5. Type: Automatic draining, ball check. 6. Size: NPS 3/4. 7. End Connections: Threaded.

FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

Exposed-Type, Fire-Department Connection:



a. AFAC Inc. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. d. Fire Protection Products, Inc. e. GMR International Equipment Corporation. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. h. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

3. Standard: UL 405. 4. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting. 5. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 6. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal. 7. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes

and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.

8. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 9. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type. 10. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads. 11. Number ofInlets: Two.



12. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 13. Finish: Rough brass or bronze. 14. Outlet Size: NPS 4, NPS 5, NPS 6.

B. Flush-Type, Fire-Department Connection:



a. AFAC Inc. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. GMR International Equipment Corporation. d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. e. Potter Roemer.

3. Standard: UL 405. 4. Type: Flush, for wall mounting. 5. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 6. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal. 7. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes


8. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 9. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type. 10. Outlet: With pipe threads. 11. Body Style: Horizontal. 12. Number ofInlets: Two. 13. Outlet Location: See Drawings. 14. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR& STANDPIPE." 15. Finish: Rough brass or bronze. 16. Outlet Size: NPS 4, NPS 5, NPS 6, NPS 8.

C. Yard-Type, Fire-Department Connection:



a. AFAC Inc. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. d. Fire Protection Products, Inc. e. GMR International Equipment Corporation. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

3. Standard: UL 405. 4. Type: Exposed, freestanding. 5. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 300 psig. 6. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal. 7. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFP A 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes




2.11

A.

8. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. 9. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, floor type. 10. Outlet: Bottom, with pipe threads. 11. Number ofInlets: Two. 12. Sleeve: Brass. 13. Sleeve Height: 18 inches. 14. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 15. Finish Rough brass or bronze. 16. Outlet Size: NPS 4, NPS 5, NPS 6.

SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 300 psig 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory "listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 300 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

C. Branch Line Testers:




a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Potter Roemer.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig 4. Body Material: Brass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc. b. Triple R Specialty. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company. e. Viking Corporation.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 300 psig. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:


a. CECA, LLC. b. Corcoran Piping System Co. c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum 300 psig. 4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Length: Adjustable. 7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:


a. Fivalco Inc. b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474.



2.12

A.

3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid.

4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum 300 psig. 5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

SPRINKLERS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. AFAC Inc. 2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 5. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. 6. Victaulic Company. 7. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:


2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psigmaximum. 3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. 4. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum 300 psig.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199 3. Residential Applications: UL 1626 4. Characteristics: Nominal 112-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D: Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Characteristics:

a. Nominal 112-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8 b. Nominal 17/32-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2

E. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. 3. Painted.

F. Special Coatings:

1. Wax. 2. Lead. 3. Corrosion-resistant paint.



G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards:

2.13

A.

B.


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

ALARM DEVICES

Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:


a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 753. 3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel. 4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish. 5. Size: 10-inchdiameter. 6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction. 7. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 8. Outlet: NPS 1 drain connection.

C. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company. b. Notifier; a Honeywell company. c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

2. Standard: UL 464. 3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. 4. Size: 6-inch minimum 8-inch minimum 10-inchdiameter.



5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.

D. Water-Flow Indicators:


a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries. c. Potter Electric Signal Company. d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. e. Viking Corporation. f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary

contacts, 7 A, 125-Vac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated. 6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

E. Pressure Switches:


a. AFAC Inc. b. Barksdale, Inc. c. Detroit S witch, Inc. d. Potter Electric Signal Company. e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. g. United Electric Controls Co. h. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

F. Valve Supervisory Switches:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company. b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Potter Electric Signal Company. d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.



5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

G. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:

2.14

A.

2.15

A.

2.16

A.


a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.

MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

CONTROL PANELS

Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.

1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries. .

2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 112 pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

PRESSURE GAGES


1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division. 2. Ashcroft, Inc. 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1I2-inch diameter.



D.

E.

F.

2.17

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

2.l8

A.

B.

Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIRIWATER" label on dial face.

Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

ESCUTCHEONS

General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-screws.

One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw.

Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge.

One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

SLEEVES

Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (O.6-mm) minimum thickness; ~ound tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTMA 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated, plain ends.

G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with .integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

2.19 SLEEVE SEALS




1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.20 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: SOOO-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

B.

3.3

A.

PREPARATION

Perform fire- hydrant flow test according to NFP A 13 and NFP A 291. U s.e results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

Report test results promptly and in writing.

SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."

Install shutoff valve, as noted on drawings pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

W ATER-SUPPL Y CONNECTIONS

Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for interior piping in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."



3.4

B.

C.

A.

Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-distribution piping.

Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.

PIPING INSTALLATION

Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFP A 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFP A 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

1. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install automatic ball drip drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFP A 13.

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler. test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 114 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

N. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.

O. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.



3.5

P.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 "Heat Tracing for Fire- Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-112 and larger end connections.


Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quaJier turn or tighten retainer pin. .

1. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Iightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS DI0.12M1DI0.l2, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

K. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to A WW A C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to A WW A C606 for steel-pipe joints.

L. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to A WW A C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to A WWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

M. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.



3.6

3.7

N. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

O. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to A WWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and boIts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to A WWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

P. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

Q. Extruded- Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

R. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

S. Plastic-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

A.

A.

B.

C.

D.

1. Comply with ASTMF 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846ID 2846M Appendix.

INST ALLA TION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING

Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler plpmg according to manufacturer's "Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R for supports.

VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves a'nd trim, controls, and specialties according to NFP A 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.

2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection. 3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply to

deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.



3.8

A.

B.

C.

3.9

A.

B.

C.

3.10

A.

B.

SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

Install wall-type, fire-department connections.

Install yard-type, fire-department connections in concrete slab support. Comply with requirements for concrete in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.".

1. Install two protective pipe bollards on sides of each fire-department connection. Comply with requirements for bollards in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications".

Install automatic drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.

ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with

polished chrome-plated finish. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished

chrome-plated finish. . 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated

finish. 5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass. 6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

C. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split casting, cast brass with chrome-plated finish. 2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge and spring clips. 3. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with

chrome-plated finish. 4. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with chrome

plated finish. 5. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with polished chrome

plated finish. 6. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split casting, cast brass. 7. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting floor plate.



3.11

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

SLEEVE INSTALLATION

General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals.

Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1I4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Molded PE. 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or

Other Wet Areas: Galvanized-steel pipe. .

a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for flashing in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:

a. PVC-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water-supply tubes and waste pipes for

individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Molded PE. 5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:

a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Cast-iron wall-pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.



L.

3.12

A.

B.

3.13

A.

B.

3.14

A.

B.

c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide I-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.

6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. PVC-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

IDENTIFICATION

Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Perform tests and inspections.

Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment:

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




3.15

A.

B.

3.16

A.

3.17

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

CLEANING

Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

DEMONSTRA nON

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.

PIPING SCHEDULE

Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded.

Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified fittings.

Copp~r-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper tubing instead of specified copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be brazed.

CPVC pipe; Schedule 40 CPVC fittings; and solvent-cemented joints may be used for light-hazard and residential occupancies.

Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

l. Standard-weight Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard-weight Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with plain ends; un~oated, plain-end-pipe fittings; and twist-locked joints.

4. Standard-weight Schedule 30 galvanized-steel pipe with plain ends; galvanized, plain-endpipe fittings; and twist-locked joints.

5. Standard-weight Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

6. Standard-weight Schedule 30, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

7. Standard-weight Schedule 30, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

8. Thinwall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

9. Thinwall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with plain ends; ncoated, plain-end-pipe fittings; and twist-locked joints.

10. Thinwall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints. 11. Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 12. Type L Type B, hard copper tube with plain ends; cast-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints. 13. Type L hard copper tube with plain ends; copper pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed

joints.



14. NPS 2, Type L Type M, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

F. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Standard-weight galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

5. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 6. Thinwall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings

for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 7. Thinwall Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints. 8. Type L Type B, hard copper tube with plain ends; cast-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints. 9. Type L Type B hard copper tube with plain ends; copper pressure-seal fittings; and pressure

sealed joints. 10. Type L, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-end

tube couplings; and grooved joints.

G. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-ron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

5. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with piain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 6. Thinwall black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel

piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 7. Thinwall black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints. 8. Type L hard copper tube with plain ends; cast-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazedjoints. 9. Type L, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-end

tube couplings; and grooved joints.

H. High-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 4 and smaller the following:



3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 4. Thinwall black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints.

I. High-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger one of the following:




3.18

A.


3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. 4. Thinwall black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints.

SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers Recessed sprinklers Flush sprinklers

Concealed sprinklers Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers as indicated. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright sprinklers

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. 2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. 3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. 4. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome. 5. Upright and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough

bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.




SECTION 22-0500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

l.3

1.4


A.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Supports and anchorages.

DEFINITIONS

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

SUBMlTTALS

A. Welding certificates.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to A WS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

COMMON ORK RESULTS FO RPLUMBING 220500-1


B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B3l Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed A WS qualification tests for welding processes involved

and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

2.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

2.3

A.

B.

PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

JOINING MATERIALS

Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME BI6.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, liS-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, BoIts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB S13.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.S, BCuP Series or BAgl, unless otherwise indicated.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS DI0.12.

Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTMF 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 313S.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

COMMON ORK RESULTS FO RPlUMBING 22050(}'2


2.4

2.5

2.6

C.

D.

E.

F.

A.

B.

c.

D.

A.

B.

C.

Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 degF.

Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

MEC~CALSLEEVESEALS

Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

SLEEVES

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

Steel Pipe: ASTMA 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain. ends.

Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

E.

F.

G.

A.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

ESCUTCHEONS

Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.



2.7

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

l. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

A.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

GROUT

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

l. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.


Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.



F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

COMMON ORK RESULTS FO RPLUMBINC 220500-4


3.2

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for

pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

P.

Q.

R.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.


Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in req uirements.

PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.


Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTMB 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with A WS A5.8.


COMMON ORK RESULTS FO RPLUMBING 22050()'5


3.3

3.4

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS DI0.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

1. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

J.

K.

A.

A.

B.

c.

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTMD 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846ID 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTMD 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTMD 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTMD 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTMD 3138 Appendix.

Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTMD 3l39.

Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

PIPING CONNECTIONS

Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

COMMON ORK RESULTS FO RPLUMBING 22050()'6


D.

3.5

A.

3.6

A.

B.

C.

3.7

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

CONCRETE BASES


1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.



5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

Field Welding: Comply with A WS D 1.1.

GROUTING

Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

Place grout around anchors.

Cure placed grout.



j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j


SECTION 22-0519

METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product certificates.

C. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMET ALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Miljoco Corporation. 5. Nanmac Corporation. 6. Noshok. 7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 9. Tel- Tru Manufacturing Company. 10. Trerice, H. O. Co. 11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. l3. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 14. Winters Instruments - U.S.

C. Standard: ASME B40.200.

METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-1


D.

E.

G.

H.

1.

J.

K.

L.

M.

2.2

A.

B.

2.3

A.

Case: type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.

Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and degC.

Connector Type(s): Union joint, rigid, back, with unified-inch screw threads.

Connector Size: 112 inch (13 mm), with ASME B 1.1 screw threads.

Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.

Window: Plain glass.

Ring: Stainless steel.

Element: Bimetal coil.

Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

THERMOWELLS

Thermowells:

l. Standard: ASMEB40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNRor CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,) ASME B1.20.l

pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 112,3/4, and 1 inch (13,19, and 25 mm), with ASMEiH.l screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Inseliion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer

connection.

Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

PRESSURE GAGES

Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial- Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries.

METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519-2


d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation. g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. k. Trerice, H. O. Co. I. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

3. Standard: ASMEB40.100. 4. Case: Sealed, type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-l/2-inch (ll4-mm) nominal diameter. 5. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 112 (DN 15), ASME B 1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 7. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 8. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi and

kPa. 9. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 10. Window: Glass 11. Ring: Metal 12. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

1.

INSTALLATION

Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

Install thermo wells with extension on insulated piping.

Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

Install thermometers in the following locations:

METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519-3


3.2

3.3

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.

K. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

L.

M.

A.

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be the following:


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following:


D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be the following:


E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C).

B. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C).

C. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F (0 to plus 115 deg C).

D. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F (0 to 150 deg C).

E. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 degF (0 to 150 deg C).

F. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C).

G. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C).



3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:


C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:


3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi and 0 to 600 kPa.

B. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.

C. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 200 psi and 0 to 1400 kPa.

D. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi and 0 to 600 kPa.

E. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.

F. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi and 0 to 1400 kPa.




SECTION 22-0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. 6. Equipment supports.


Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. .

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Welding celiificates.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-1



A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSDl.1/Dl.IM, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support. assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.



2.4

A.

B.

2.5

A.

2.6

A.

2.7

A.

B.

FASTENER SYSTEMS

Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

EQillPMENT SUPPORTS

Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Propeliies: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: SOOO-psi (34.S-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, suppOlis, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and suppOli together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/ A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to A WS D1.lIDI.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:



1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.

F. Install hangers and suppOlis complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B3I.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inselis may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 114 to NPS 3-112 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91

mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch

(2.67 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with A WS Dl.l1Dl.lM procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distOliion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of

welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm)



3.5 PAINTING

3.6

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPCPAl requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

B.

c.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. .

HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

Specific hanger and support requirements are in Secti~ns specifying piping systems and equipment.

Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. .

Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 112 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 112 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 112 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to

DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.



7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods iflongitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachmen t to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Sid{}-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by

using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 Ib (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 Ib (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib (1360 kg).

8. Sid{}-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.



N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if veliical movement does not exceed 1-114 inches (32 mm).

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.




SECTION 22-0700

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Polyolefin. e. Polystyrene.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "BY AC Insulation."

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of YOC content.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type

of insulation.

PLUMBING INSULATION 22070()'1


D.

1.3

A.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application offield-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type.

Field quality-control reports.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

INSULATION MATERIALS

Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 87l.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTMC 795.

Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

l. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cell-U -Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 2.



G.

7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.


a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.

I. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. KnaufInsulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IlIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type lB. Nominal density is 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in.lh x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W 1m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700.3



a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. KnaufInsulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

L. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.


a. Armacell LLC; Tubolit. b. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY. c. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell.

M. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thennal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in.lh x sq. ft. x degF (0.038 Wlm x K) after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam. b. KnaufInsulation; KnaufPolystyrene.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A.

2.3

A.

B.

Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 4491C 449M.


a. Insulco, Division ofMFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

ADHESIVES

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

Cellular-Glass Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).


PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-4


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpartD (EPA Method 24).

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply withMIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class 1.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,_ but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive 'with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 degC).



F. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



PLUMBING INSULATION 22070a.S


2.4


G. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

A.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.l.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpartD (EPA Method 24).

MASTICS

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 250 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.0l3 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 degF (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.



2.5

A.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249,3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 degF (Minus 29 to plus 93 deg C). 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

SEALANTS

Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division oflTW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-70. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 degF (Minus '73 to plus 149 degC). 6. Color: White or gray. 7. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 giL or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpartD (EPA Method 24).

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division oflTW; CP-76-S. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpmiD (EPA Method 24).

PLUMBING INSULATION 22070().7


2.6

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

A.


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 degF (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 giL or less when


F ACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factoryapplied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTME 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into th~ Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric perms) when tested according to ASTME 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.





2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.


a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab. b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.l.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTMB 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003,3005,3105 or 5005, TemperH-14.


a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. P ABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Factory cut and rolled to size. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.



2.9

4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45 - and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only iffactory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.

D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven- glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.

A.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125.

TAPES

ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 A WF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 A WF FSK.



d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lb£'inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares ofFSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lb£'inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 A WF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CWo

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.

E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lb£'inch (10.1 N/mm) in width.

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700·11


2.10

A.

SECUREMENTS

Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTMB 209M), Alloy 3003,3005,3105, or 5005; TemperH-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide wing or closed seal.


a. Childers Products; Bands. b. P ABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following req uirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zi nc-coated, low carbon stee], fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches (63 mm).

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.



3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-112 inches (38 mm) in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch(0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required 'to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.


1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C&F Wire. b. Childers Products. c. P ABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc.



2.11

A.

B.

CORNER ANGLES

PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC according to ASTMD 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTMB 209M), Alloy 3003,3005,3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

PREPARATION

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

GENERAL INST ALLA TION REQUIREMENTS

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.



2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at2 inches (50 mm) o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

PLUMBING INSULATION

Install insulation continuously through roof

220700-15


3.4

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with j oint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and paliitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

A.

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping."

EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage oftank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of

tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature

and with substrate.



3.5

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm) from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and

vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm). 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes,

and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints,

seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

A.

B.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation



3.6

by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

A.

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.



3.7

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapOl'- barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellularglass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

A.

B.

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



3.8


A.

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

MINERAL-FIBER INSULA nON INST ALLA nON


1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as ovemll width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1

inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.



3.9

A.

POL YOLEFIN INSULA nON INST ALLA nON


1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of poly olefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install cut sections of poly olefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.10 POLYSTYRENE INSULA nON INST ALLA nON

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of

adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed I-II2-inch (38-mm) thickness.



3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.


1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.


3.11

A.

1. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

Where FSKjackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with I-II2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide

joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with

vapor- barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with I-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation ofPVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.



3.12

A.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-112-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-114 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

FINISHES

Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C.

D.

3.13

A.

B.

c.

3.14

A.

Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

DOMESTIC WATER BOILER BREECHING INSULATION SCHEDULE

Round, Exposed Breeching and Connector Insulation: High-temperature mineral-fiber blanket, 3 inches (75 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal density.



B.

3.15

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3.16

A.

B.

3.17

A.

Round, Concealed Breeching and Connector Insulation: High-temperature mineral-fiber blanket, 3 inches (75 mm) thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

Heat-Exchanger (Water-to-Water for Domestic Water Heating Service) Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

Domestic water, domestic chilled-water (potable), and domestic hot-water hydropneumatic tank insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 m m) thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

Domestic Hot-Water Storage Tank Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: Of thickness to provide an R-value of 12.5.

Piping System Filter-Housing Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

Domestic Cold, Hot, and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inch (50 mm) thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

B. Domestic Chilled Water (Potable): Insulation shall be the following:

I. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

C. Stormwater and Overflow: Insulation shall be one of the following:




D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: Insulation shall be one of the following:


E. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch (l3 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 112 inch (13 mm) thick. 3. Polyolefin: 112 inch (l3 mm) thick.

F. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-112 inches (38 mm) thick.

3.18 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Water Piping: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 4. Polyolefin: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 5. Polystyrene: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 4. Polyolefin: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

C. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

3.19 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 33 piping distribution Sections.

B. Sanitary Waste Piping, All Sizes, Where Heat Tracing Is Installed: Cellular glass, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.



3.20 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory- applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Equipment, Concealed:

1. None. 2. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick.

D. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches (1800 mm):


E. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):

l. None. 2. Painted Aluminum, with 2-l/2-Inch- (65-mm-) Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm)

thick.

F. Piping, Concealed:


G. Piping, Exposed:

l. None. 2. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

3.21 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material.




SECTION 221113

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

1.3

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.

DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.

H. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 1


C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression waterservice piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fireservice-main products.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppt:ession.

G. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic

water.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew

point temperature. SUppOlt off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113-2


C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of ditt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

1.8 COORD INA TION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA CISI, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-J oint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA CIS3, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: A WW A C 111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA CISI, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WWA ClIO, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or A WWA C1S3, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: A WW A C 111, rubber.

C. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WW A CISI, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.



1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Company of America.

c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

d. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: A WWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig.

1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made ofPA, PP, or PVC with serrated male insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings.

2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class.

B. PE, AWWA Pipe: A WWA C906, DR No. 7.3,9, or 9.3; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160. .

1. PE, A WWA Fittings: A WWA C906, socket- or butt-fusion type, with DR number matching pipe and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig.


A. Ductile-Iron Rigid Expansion Joints:

1. A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.



2.4

3. Description: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with A WW A C 110 or A WW A C 153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include A WWA Clll, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. c. Star Pipe Products.

3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA ClIO or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include A WWA CIll, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.


C. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:

A.



a. EBAA Iron, Inc.

3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and I or 2 flexing sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWACll0 or AWWACI53. Include AWWACl11, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.


JOINING MATERIALS

Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials.

F ACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 5


B. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS.S, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

D. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. e. JCM Industries. f. Smith-Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson.>

3. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. .

a. Standard: AWWAC219. b. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:



a. Victaulic Depend -0-Lok.

3. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners.

F ACILITY WATER DISTRIB UTION PIPING 221113 - 6


2.6

a. Standard: A WW A C219. b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. d. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. e. Pressure Rating: 150 psigminimum. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

D. Flexible Connectors:

1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with coppertube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.

2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with ASME B 1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B 16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose.

E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end types; and matching piping system materials.

A.

1. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig m1ll1mUm working pressure at 180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B 1.20.1.

2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with i)1ert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 cleg F.

5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 cleg F .

CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT

Encasement for Underground Metal Piping:

1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or A WWA C105. 2. Form: Sheet. 3. Color: Black.

2.7 GA TE V ALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:





3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American A VK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. k. NIBCO INC. 1. U.S. Pipe and Foundry CompanyRetain any of five subparagraphs and associated

subparagraphs below for valve types and pressure ratings required. If more than one pressure zone is required, show pressure ratings of valves on Drawings.

4. Nonrising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with cast-iron or bronze double-disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA CSOO. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with A WWA CSSO.

S. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: A WW A CS09. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with A WWA CSSO.

6. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA CS09. 2) MinimumPressure Rating: 2S0 psig. 3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint.



4) Interior Coating: Complying with A WWA C550.

7. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Metal-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with cast-iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: A WW A C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged.

8. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.

1) Standard: A WW A C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged.

B. UL/FMG, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. . c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. NIB CO INC. i. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

4. UL/FMG, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Flanged.

5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:



2.8

a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged.

C. Bronze Gate Valves:

A.



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation.

4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Threaded.

5. Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron handwheel.

1) Standard: MSS SP-80.

GA TE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:




F ACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 10


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Flowserve. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

4. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: A WWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with A WWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel oflength required for depth of burial of valve.

2.9 CHECK VALVES

A. A WW A Check Valves:




a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. APCO Williamette; Valve and Primer Corporation. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.



j. NIB CO INC. k. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

4. Description: Swing-check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to A WW A C550 and ends to match piping.

a. Standard: A WW A C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

2.1 0 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. AWWA Butterfly Valves:




a. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. Mosser Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. d. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. Pratt, Henry Company. f. Va1-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

4. Description: Rubber seated.

a. Standard: A WW A C504. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Wafer. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

2.11 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves:




a. DeZURIK/Copes-Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113-12


c. Milliken Valve Company. d. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. e. Pratt, Henry Company. f. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

4. Description: Resilient-seated eccentric.

a. Standard: MSS SP-108. b. Body: Cast iron. c. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum CWP. d. Seat Material: Suitable for potable-water service.

2.12 CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES]

A. Manufacturers:



a. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Co. b. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. c. Jones, James Company. d. Master Meter, Inc. e. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. g. Red Hed Manufacturing & Supply.

B. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with A WWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible with tapping machine.

1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and A WW A C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve.

2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with A WWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

C. Curb Valves: Comply with A WWA C800. Include bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.

D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to A WWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches (75111111) in diameter.

1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.



2.13

A.

2.14

A.

2.15

A.

2.16

A.

WATER METERS

Water meters will be furnished by utility company.

PRES SURE-REDUCING VALVES

Water Regulators:




a. Cash Acme; a division of The Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. Copy and

edit paragraph and subparagraphs below for each type of water control valve required.

RELIEF VALVES

Air-Release Valves:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:


a. Crispin-Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:




2.17

A.

2.18

A.


3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings.

WATER METER BOXES

Description: Cast-iron body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping.

PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES

Freeze-Protection Enclosures:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings.

4. Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F.

a. Standard: ASSE 1060.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.



3.3

3.4

D.

A.

A.

Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.


See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common requirements.

PIPING INST ALLA TION

Water-Main COlmection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.

D. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards.

2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves.

3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. 6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or A WWA C105. 2. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to A WWA C600 and A WWA M41.

1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or A WW A C1 05.

G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTMF 645.

H. Install PVC, A WWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and A WWA M23.

FACILITY WATERDlSTRlBUTION PIPING 221113 - 16


3.5

I. Install fiberglass A WWA pipe according to A WWA M45.

J. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches, with top at least 12 inches below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches cover over top. 2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches additional cover.

K. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

L. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

M.

N.

O.

P.

Q.

A.

B.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

See Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for fire-suppression-water piping inside the building.

See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.

Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: A WW A C600 and AWWAM41.

3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 4. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved

end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.

5. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.



3.6

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

6. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to A WWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Fiberglass Piping Bonded Joints: Use adhesive and procedure recommended by piping manufacturer.

8. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

VALVE INSTALLATION

AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWAC600 and AWWAM44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

ULlFMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

3.7 DETECTOR-CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install in vault or aboveground.

B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.

C. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

D. Support NPS 2-112 and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and OJ! brick or concrete piers.



3.9 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface.

B. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches above surface.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment.

C. Connect water-distribution piping to utility water main.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-halftimes working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50 -psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 qua Its per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for identifying devices.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.






SECTION 22-1116

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

1.2

1.3

SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 8. Wall penetration systems.

B. Related Section:

A.

A.

B.

C.

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installatio!1 shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including printed statement ofVOC content.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 111 (}'1


C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

B.

2.3

A.

2.4

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

2.S

A.

B.

PIPING MATERIALS

Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


Hard Copper Tube: ASTMB 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) water tube, annealed temper.

DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA CIS 1, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

a. Gaskets: AWWA Clll, rubber.

b. Gaskets: AWWA Clll, rubber.

PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: A WWA Cll 0, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B 16 .21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full- face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. .

Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME BI8.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTMB 813.

Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS.81 AS .8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

TRANSITION FITTINGS

Fitting- Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

Sleeve- Type Transition Coupling: A WW A C219.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2


2.6

2.7

2.8

A.

B.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

Dielectric Unions:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings:

a. Galvanized-steel coupling. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). c. End Connections: Female threaded. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.

F. Dielectric Nipples:

A.

B.

A.

a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at225 deg F (107 deg C). c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire- braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

WATER METERS

Displacement-Type Water Meters:

a. Standard: A WW A C700.



2.9

b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded.

B. Compound-Type Water Meters:

a. Standard: A WW A C702. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure. c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility

company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections: Flanged.

C. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with A WWA C707; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by utility company.

ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with spring clips.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome -plated finish with concealed hi nge, setscrew or spring clips.

G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.10 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (O.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.



2.11 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

2.12 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

EARTHWORK

Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to A WW A C600 and AWWAM41.

Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

Install water-pres sure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 111 f>.5


3.3

1.

1.

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

Q.

R.

S.

T.

U.

A.

B.

c.

Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.

Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.

Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION


Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116-6


3.4

3.5

3.6

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTMB 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASMEB31.9.

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dlY joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

H.

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

c.

Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

VALVE INSTALLATION

General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger.

Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.

TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water PipingNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-tometal transition fittings.

DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-112 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flange kits.



3.7

3.8

3.9

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

A.

B.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge plpmg connections to each domestic water pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.

Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.

Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

WATER METER INSTALLATION

Rough-in domestic water piping , and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.

Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

Install water meters according to A WW A M6, utility company's requirements, and the following:

Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction.


Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic ~ontrols for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type I, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) IfIndicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. SUppOlt veltical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum oB/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (l500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-114 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-112 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (lO-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-112 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 112-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 112-inch (13-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-114 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (lO-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-112 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS2-1I2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m)with 1I2-inch(13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-112 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 112-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (l9-mm) rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger.

3.11 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.



3.12

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or spring clips.

3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split plate, stamped steel with set screw.

4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or spring clips.

5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or spring clips. 6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

SLEEVE INSTALLATION

General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, pmiitions, roofs, and walls.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.

Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1I4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe. 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or

Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.

a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116·10


L.

3.13

A.

B.

3.14

A.

B.

3.15

A.

B.

b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger. c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for

individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe. 5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger. c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide I-inch (25 -mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.

6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.

Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten boIts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

IDENTIFICATION

Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



Piping Inspections:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

C. Piping Tests:

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective ifit does not pass tests and inspections.



E.

3.16

A.

B.

C.

3.17

A.

B.

C.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

CLEANING

Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water!chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

PIPING SCHEDULE

Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, shall be one ofthe following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A); wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact- pattern mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

3. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTMB 88, TypeL (ASTMB 88M, TypeB; cast- or wrought- copper

solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-112 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be the following:



1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B; wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

3.18 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for pipingNPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.




SECTION 22-1119

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Hose bibbs. 8. Wall hydrants. 9. Drain valves. 10. Water hammer arresters. 11. Trap-seal primer valves.


1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 3. Division22 Section "Domestic Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters III domestic

water piping. 4. Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for water

coolers.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.3

1.4

A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.

SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NSF Compliance:

DOMESSTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1119-1


1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

V ACUUM BREAKERS

Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Size: NPS 114 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 7. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:



a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIF AB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

DOMESSTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22111<),2


2.2

A.

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Intermediate Atmospheric- Vent Backflow Preventers:



a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1012. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Size: As noted on drawings. 6. Body: Bronze. 7. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 8. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

4. Standard: ASSE 1013. 5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 113 of flow range. 7. Size: As noted on drawings. 8. Design Flow Rate: As noted on drawings. 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

A WWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger. 10. End Connections: Threaded forNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

and larger. 11. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 12. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

DOMESSTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119-3


2.3

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME AI12.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

A.




a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

4. Standard: ASSE 1015. 5. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: As noted on drawings. 8. Design Flow Rate: As noted on drawings. 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

A WW A C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger. 10. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-112 (DN 65)

and larger. 11. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 12. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

WATER PRES SURE-REDUCING VAL YES

Water Regulators:



a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1003. 4. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure ofl50 psig (1035 kPa). 5. Size: As noted on drawings. 6. Design Flow Rate: As noted on drawings. 7. Design Inlet Pressure: As noted on drawings.



S. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: As noted on drawings. 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

A WWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN SO). 10. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-112 and

NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN SO).

2.4 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red- White Valve Corp.

3. Standard: MSS SP-11 0 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 4. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 5. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller. 6. Body: Copper alloy. 7. Port: Standard or full port. S. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 10. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 11. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one ofthe following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Leonard Valve Company. d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

4. Standard: ASSE 1017. 5. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (S60 kPa).



2.6

A.

2.7

A.

6. Type: Exposed-mounting, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 7. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 8. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 9. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and

adjustable, temperature-control handle. 10. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F (41deg C). 12. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: As noted on drawings. 13. Selected Valve Flow Rate at As noted on drawings. 14. Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 15. Piping Finish: Chrome plated. 16. Cabinet: Factory-fabricated, stainless steel, for surface mounting and with hinged, stainless

steel door.

STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWAC550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and forNPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-112 (DN 65)

and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm). b. Strainers NPS 2-112 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

HOSE BIBBS

Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASMEA112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 112 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B 1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integralor field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection

vacuum breaker complying with AS SE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.



2.8

A.

WALL HYDRANTS

Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:



a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Standard: ASME AI12.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 5. Operation: Loose key. 6. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. 7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25). 8. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B 1.20.7. 9. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 10. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 11. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden- hose thread complying with

ASME B 1.20.7. 12. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 13. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

B. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:



a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B. 4. Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve. 5. Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and

nozzle closed. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Operation: Loose key. 8. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp.



2.9

A.

2.10

A.

2.11

A.

9. Inlet: NPS 112 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20). 10. Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME Bl.20.7.

DRAIN VALVES

Ball- Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-II 0 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B l.20. 7 and

cap with brass chain.

WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

Water Hammer Arresters:

l. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIF AB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. j.

3. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 20 l. 4. Type: Copper tube with piston. 5. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

TRAP- SEAL PRIMER VALVES

Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:



a. MIF AB, Inc.



b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1018. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 112 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 7. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 8. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome

finished.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

INSTALLATION

Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Instal1 balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Instal1 thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Instal1 cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wal1 as specified.

F. Instal1 Y-pattem strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve.

G. Instal1 water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

H. Instal1 supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

I. Piping instal1ation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.



3.2

3.3

J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

K.

A.

B.

A.

B.

c.

1. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 4. Water pressure-reducing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.

Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. "


Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

l. Test each reduced-pres sure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflowprevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

ADJUSTING

Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.

Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.




SECTION 221313

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following components:

1. Special fittings for expansion and deflection. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Corrosion-protection piping encasement.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-cliene-monomer rubber.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. LLDPE: Linear low-ciensity, polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

H. RTRF: Glass-fiber-reinforced, thermosetting-resin fitting.

I. RTRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced, thermosetting-resin pipe.

J. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head ofwatel' .

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - I


1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Special pipe fittings. 2. Backwater valves.

B. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. .

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 2


2.4 HUBLESS CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

C. Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Couplings for NPS 1-112 to NPS 4: 2-1/8 -inch- wide shield with 2 bands. 3. Couplings forNPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands. 4. Couplings forNPS 8 and NPS 10: 4-inch- (wide shield with 4 bands.

D. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings, NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless-steel shield; 2 or more stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division ofMCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS: 3 inches. 3. Couplings forNPS 5 to NPS 10: 4 inches.

E. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings, NPS 12 and NPS 15: With· ASTM A666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO. b. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division ofMCP Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Couplings: 5-112-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313-3


F. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainlesssteel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. MG Piping Products Co.

2. Couplings forNPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch wide housing with 2 bolts. 3. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3 -1/8- inch- wide housing with 4 bolts. 4. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10: 4-inch- wide housing with 4 bolts.

G. Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, rigid, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. [Available ]Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

2. Couplings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: Sleeve with two bands.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Pressure Pipe: A WWA C900, Class 100, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketedjoints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile-iron, compact fittings complying with A WWA C153, for push-on joints and using A WWA Clll, rubber gaskets.

B. PVC Water-Service Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 pipe, with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints with ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40, socket-type fittings.

C. PVC Cellular-Core Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness pipe with ASTM D 3034,SDR 35>, socket-type fittings for solvent-cemented joints.

D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (and Smaller: ASTM D 3034,[SDR 35, with bell-andspigot ends for gasketedjoints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

E. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell-and-spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.6 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:



1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 2. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTMF 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring corrosionresistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

a. <Insert manufacturer's name>

E. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

F. Nonpressure-Type, Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

2.7 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

1. ]Manufacturers:

a. Josam Company. b. MIF AB Manufacturing Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy and Extra-heavy duty. 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."



3.2 PIPING APPLICA nONS

A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range:

1. NPS 3 : Hub-and-spigot, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketedjoints.

2. NPS 3: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; couplings; and coupled joints. 3. NPS: NPS 6) ductile-iron, gravity sewer pipe or NPS 3 or NPS 4 ductile-iron pressure

pipe; ductile-iron standardfittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 3: Stainless-steel drainage pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. Use

EPDM-compound gaskets, unless otherwise indicated. Use nitrile-rubber-compound gaskets for wastes containing gasoline or oil.

5. NPS 3: ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketedjoints. 6. NPS 3: PVC water-service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water-service-pipe fittings; and

solvent-cemented joints. 7. NPS 3 : NPS ) PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:



1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install piping [NPS 6 (DN 150)] <Insert other> and larger with restrained joints at tee Retain subparagraph above or first subparagraph below.

3. Install piping below frost line. 4. Install hUb-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook." 5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install ductile-iron, gravity sewer piping according to ASTM A 746. 7. Install ductile-iron and special fittings according to A WW A C600 or A WW A M4I. 8. Install stainless-steel drainage piping according to ASME A 112.3.1. 9. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 10. Install PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 11. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 12. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTMF 1668. 13. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTMD 3839 and ASTM F 1668. 14. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 15. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

3. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-couplingjoints.

4. Join ductile-iron, gravity sewer piping according to A WWA C600 for push-on joints. 5. Join ductile-iron and special fittings according to A WW A C600 or A WW A M 41. 6. Join stainless-steel drainage piping according to ASME AI12.3.1. 7. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomeric

seal joints. 8. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent

cemented joints. 9. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric

seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketjoints. 10. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 11. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 4161 for elastomeric-seal joints. 12. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasket joints.



13. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasket joints.

14. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible[ or rigid] couplings.

C. Join force-main, pressure piping according to the following:

1. Join ductile-iron pressure piping according to A WWA C600 or A WWA M41 for push-on joints.

2. Join ductile- iron special fittings according to A WW A C600 or A WW A M41 for push-on joints.

3. Join PVC pressure piping according A WWA M23 for gasketed joints. 4. Join PVC water-service piping according ASTM D 2855. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.

3.5 CLEAN OUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

l. Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.

2. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas. 3. Use extra-heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage plpmg to building'S sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.



3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.






SECTION 22-1316

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: IO-foot head of water (30 kPa).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

C. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including printed statement ofVOC content.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting seismic restraints.

2. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; and "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22131(}'1


PART 2- PRODUCTS


A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTMA 74, Service class.

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

B. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASMEBI6.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and de aerator drainage fittings.

2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 531 A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends matching joining method.

1. Drainage Fittings: ASME B 16.12, threaded, cast-iron drainage pattern. 2. Pressure Fittings:

a. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

b. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASMEBI6.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

c. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME BI6.4, Class 125, standard pattern. d. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME BI6.1, Class 125. e. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.l, Class 125.

D. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASMEBI6.23, cast copper or ASMEBI6.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings.

E. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40, solid wall.

1. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTMD 2661, made to ASTMD 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

a. Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316-2


1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpaIi D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.l

A.

B.

C.

PIPING APPLICATIONS

Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, shielded, stainless

steel couplings; and hUbless-couplingjoints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall beany of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, shielded, stainless

steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

hub less-coupling joints. 3. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

F. Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and

hubless-coupling joints. 3. ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



3.2

A.


Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 114 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to veliical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and lI8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

l. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

1. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

K. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.

L. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

M. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTMD 232l.

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 1316-4


3.3

3.4

3.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

B.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTMB 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTMD 2665.

VALVE INSTALLATION

General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.

1. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-112 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.

A.

B.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally cl,?sed type, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."


Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), ifIndicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.


C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Support veliical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-112 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 112-inch (I3-mm) rod. 3. NPS4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-114 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-112 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (1 O-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS2-112(DN65): 11 feet (3.4 m)with 1I2-inch(13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1I2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (l6-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

1. Install supports for veliical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-114 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (lO-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-112 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-112 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 112-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 112-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.

K. Install supports for veliical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.



3.7

3.8

B.

A.

Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.


During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. RepOlis: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

A.

B.

C.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

CLEANING

Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.




SECTION 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAIN PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps."

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 1 a-foot head of water. 2. Storm Drainage, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 1413 - 1


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Per General Requirements

C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.



A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.



2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosionresistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. -steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Fernco, Inc. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Clamp-All Corp. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, castiron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) MG Piping Products Co.

C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosionresistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

2.5 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Standard Weight or Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends matching joining method.

B. Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12[, galvanized], threaded, cast-iron drainage pattern.

Facility Storm Drainage Piping 221413 - 3


C. Pressure Fittings:

1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

3. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.

4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 5. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, galvanized.

D. Grooved-Joint Systems:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Anvil International. b. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. c. Victaulic Co. of America. d. Ward Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Grooved-End, Steel-Piping Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, galvanized, malleable-iron casting; ASTM A 106, galvanized-steel pipe; or ASTM A 536, galvanized, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

3. Grooved-End, Steel-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

2.6 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C11 0, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA Cl10, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Grooved-Joint Systems:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Victaulic Co. of America.



2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.7 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast-copper or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types Land M, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2.8 Not Used

2.9 Not Used


A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Co. e. NDS, Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.



2. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with

pipe materials being joined.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co.

C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducingor transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. c. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. d. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. e. JCM Industries, Inc. f. Romac Industries, Inc. g. Smith-Blair, Inc. h. Viking Johnson.

2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanicaljoint ends complying with AWWAC110 or AWWAC153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

1. Manufacturers:

a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.



F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

1. Manufacturers:

a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.

G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C11 0 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

1. Manufacturers:

a. SIGMA Corp.

2.11 Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.



D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Extra-heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.

E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be the following:

1. Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints.

F. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, Type L ; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.

G. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 6 shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. 3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved

joints.PIPING INSTALLATION

H. Not Used

I. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties. "

L. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping.

M. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

N. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to COA'S "Copper Tube Handbook."

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C1 05.

O. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C1 05.



P. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

Q. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

R. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

S. Install engineered controlled-flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated.

T. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-ongrade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

U. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPl's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, leadfree-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe and assemble grooved ends of pipes, grooved-end fittings, and grooved-end-piping couplings according to AWWA C606.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "GeneralDuty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge.

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.



C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping

Specialties. "

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.


B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 1-1/4: B4 inches with 3lB-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 10B inches with 3lB-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3!8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS3: 12 feet with 1/2-inchrod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5lB-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet) with 3/4-inch rod. B. NPS B to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7lB-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3lB-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3lB-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 10B inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5lB-inch rod. 6. NPS B: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

K. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 4B inches with 3lB-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 4B inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 4B inches with 5lB-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 4B inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS B to NPS 12: 4B inches with 7lB-inch rod.

L. Install supports for vertical [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping every 4B inches.

M. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.




A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. .

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 1413 -12


SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

1.3

1.4

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties: 1. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 2. Roof drains. 3. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 4. Flashing materials.


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

A.

1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, floor drains, trench drains and channel drainage systems connected to sanitary sewer, air admittance valves, FOG disposal systems, grease interceptors and removal devices, oil interceptors, and solid interceptors.

DEFINITIONS

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

PE: Polyethylene plastic.

PP: Polypropylene plastic.

PUR: Polyurethane plastic.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

SUBMITTALS


STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIAL TIES 22 1423 - I



A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

2.2 Not Used

2.3 Not Used

2.4 Not Used

2.5 Not Used

2.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:



a. Pro Set Systems Inc.

3. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 4. Size: Same as connected pipe. 5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIAL TIES 221423 - 2


2.7 ROOF DRAINS

2.8

A. Metal Roof Drains:

A.



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Froet combination roof drain or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Marathon Roofing Products. c. MIF AB, Inc. d. Portals Plus, Inc. e. Prier Products, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

4. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 5. Pattern: Combination roof and overflow drain. 6. Body Material: Cast Iron. 7. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required if compatible with roof material. 8. Flow-Control Weirs: Not Required. 9. Outlet: Bottom and Side for combination unit. 10. Dome Material: Aluminum, Cast Iron, or Stainless Steel. 11. Extension Collars: Required. 12. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 13. Sump Receiver: Required.

MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A II2.2l.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected piping.

B. Conductor Nozzles:

1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes.

2. Size: Same as connected conductor.



2.9 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ftthickness.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTMB 32, lead-free alloy.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller

and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed pIpmg, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install through-penetration fires top assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.

F. Install roof dmins at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07.

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423 - 4


3.2

3.3

G.

H.

1.

J.

A.

A.

1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adj oining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

CONNECTIONS

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

FLASHING INST ALLA TION

Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. , O.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints oflead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., O.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.



B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.




SECTION 22 3400

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters: 1. Commercial, high-efficiency, gas water heaters. 2. Water heater accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial water heater, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Inc,lude the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawing;; of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test repOlis.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include III emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400-1


1.5

1.6

1.7

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements. "

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASHRAEIIESNA 90.1-2004Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.

E. ASME Compliance:

F.

A.

A.

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

COORDINATION

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.

WARRANTY

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and ~upports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Household, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Two years.

b. Instantaneous, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Heat Exchanger: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

FUEl-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22340()'2


c. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

MANUFACTURERS

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:



GAS WATER HEATERS

Commercial, High-Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AERCO International. b. Bradford White Corporation. c. Heat Transfer Products, Inc. d. Laars Heating Systems; Waterpik Technologies, Inc. e. Lochinvar Corporation. f. Patterson-Kelley. g. RBI Water Heaters; a Mestek, Inc. Company. h. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. i. State Industries, Inc. j. Weben-Jarco, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietalY design to provide at least 84 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B 16.5 for steel and

stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copperalloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: [Cement] [Glass] [Nickel plate] [Phenolic coating] [Sheet copper] complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22340()'3


2.3

A.

B.

C.

D.

4. Factory-Installed, Storage- Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except

connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-Iimit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. 8. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and

disabling water heater. 9. Draft Hood: Draft diverter; complying with ANSIZ21.l2.

WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.l5/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.

Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of water heater.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. 2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.

F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch- high, enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and lAS No.2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B 1.20.1 pipe thread.

G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor mounting and capable of suppOliing water heater and water. Provide dimension that will suppOli bottom of water heater a minimum ofl8 inches above the floor.

H. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of suppOliing water heater and water.

FUEl-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22340()"4


1.

J.

K.

2.4

A.

B.

C.

Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet plpmg arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater.

Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 or ASHRAE 90.2-2004.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-halftimes pressure rating.

Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. .

C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate.

D. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

E. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

F. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

G. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control.

H. Install oil-fired water heaters according to NFP A 31.

1. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.



3.2

3.3

J. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

K. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

L. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

M. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet piping of commercial, fuel-fired water heater piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

N. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

O.

P.

Q.

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

B.

Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

Fill water heaters with water.

Charge compression tanks with air.

CONNECTIONS


Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.



C.

3.4

A.

Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instantaneous and commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


FUEl-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22340()'7


SECTION 22-4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Faucets for lavatories, showers, and sinks. 2. Flushometers. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Protective shielding guards. 5. Fixture supports. 6. Dishwasher air-gap fittings. 7. Disposers. 8. Water closets. 9. Urinals. 10. Lavatories. 11. Sinks. 12. Service sinks.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C.

D.

E.

F.

1.3

A.

B.

C.

FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

SUBMITTALS


Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

Operation and maintenance data.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22400()'1


1.4

D. LEED Submittal:

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

1. Product Data for Credit WE 3: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A1l7.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law lOl-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

NSF Standard: Comply with NSF61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME Al12.19.4M. 2. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME Al12.19.3. 3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 4. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME AI12.19.5.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Faucets: ASMEA1l2.18.1. 2. NSF Potable- Water Materials: NSF 61. 3. Pipe Threads: ASMEB1.20.1. 4. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 5. Supply Fittings: ASMEA1l2.l8.1. 6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASMEA1l2.18.2.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME Al12.18.3M. 2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016. 3. Faucets: ASMEA1l2.18.1. 4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014. 5. High- Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1. 9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 10. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-2


1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME Al 12.18.1. 3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A1l2.18.2. 7. Sensor-OperationFlushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A1l2.l 8.6. 4. Grab Bars: ASTMF 446. 5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 6. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME AI12.6.1M. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20. 1. 9. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI ZI24.5. 10. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC AI17.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets:




a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 1. m. n. o. p.

PLUMBING FIXTURES

American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Grohe America, Inc. Just Manufacturing Company. Kohler Co. Moen, Inc. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. Speakman Company. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

22400()'3


2.2

A.

4. Description: Two-handle mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.5 Umin.). d. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm. e. Mounting: Deck, concealed. f. Valve Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches (102 mm). g. Spout: Rigid type. h. Spout Outlet: Aerator. i. Operation: Compression, manual. j. Drain: Grid. k. Tempering Device: Not required.

SINK FAUCET

Sink Faucets:




a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Fisher Manufacturing Co. h. Grohe America, Inc. i. Just Manufacturing Company. j. Kohler Co. k. Moen, Inc. I. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. m. Speakman Company. n. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. o. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

4. Description: Kitchen faucet without spray, Service sink faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose-thread outlet, and pail hook, Bar sink faucet. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. Finish: Polished chrome plate. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 Umin.), unless otherwise indicated. Mixing Valve: Single control and Two-lever handle. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm), 8 inches (203 mm Adjustable. Mounting: Deck; Back/wall exposed. Handle(s): Cross, four arm, Wrist blade, 4 inches (102 mm). Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass, Rigid, solid brass with wall brace, Swivel gooseneck.



2.3

A.

2.4

A.

I. Spout Outlet: Aerator, Hose thread. j. Vacuum Breaker: Required. k. Operation: Compression, manual. I. Drain: Pop up.

FLUSHOMETERS

Flushometers:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Sloan Valve Company. b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. c. TOTO USA, Inc.

4. Description: Flushometer for urinal and water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.

a. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation. b. Style: Exposed. c. Inlet Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20); NPS 1 (DN 25). d. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator. e. Consumption: See plumbing schedule - 0.375 gaUflush (1.9 Llflush); 1.0 gaUflush

(3.8 Llflush) and 1.6 gaUflush (6.0 Llflush) dual flush. f. Tailpiece Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20); NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32 and standard length to top of

bowl.

TOILET SEATS

Toilet Seats:




a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats. d. Eljer. e. Kohler Co. f. Olsonite Corp. g. Sperzel.

4. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22400()'S


2.S

2.6

A.

A.

B.

a. Material: Molded, solid plastic with antimicrobial agent. b. Configuration: Open front without cover. c. Size: Elongated. d. Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining. e. Class: Standard commercial. f. Color: White.

PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:



a. Engineered Brass Co. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary ofMVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. e. TCI Products. f. TRUEBRO, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

3. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot-water supply and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

FIXTURE SUPPORTS

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Josam Company. 2. MIF AB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. S. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

C. Water-Closet Supports:

1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible or standard mounting height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, veliical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

D. Urinal Supports:

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22400(}'6


2.7

2.8

1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture SuppOli: Include rectangular steel uprights.

E. Lavatory SuppOlis:

A.

A.

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed aIms and tie rod for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

DISPOSERS

Disposers:




a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. In-Sink-Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co. c. KitchenAid.

4. Description: Continuous-feed household, food-waste disposer. Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper.

a. Type: Continuous-feed household. b. Motor: 115-V ac, 1725 rpm, 1/2 hp with overload protection.

WATER CLOSETS

Water Closets:




a. b. c. d. e. f.

American Standard Companies, Inc. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.lFiat Products. Eljer. Kohler Co. TOTO USA, Inc.



2.9

A.

2.10

A.

4. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

5. Style: Flushometer valve.

a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. b. Height: Standard or Accessible. c. Design Consumption: 1.0 gal./flush (3.8 Llflush) and 1.6 gal./flush (6.0 Llflush) dual

flush. d. Color: White.

URINALS

Urinals:




a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. TOTO USA, Inc.

4. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

a. Type: Washout with extended shields. b. Strainer or Trapway: Integral cast strainer with integral trap. c. Design Consumption: 0.5 gal./flush (1.9 Llflush. d. Color: White. e. Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20)] . f. Outlet Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

LAVATORIES

Lavatories:




a. b. c. d.

American Standard Companies, Inc. Commercial Enameling Company. Eljer. Kohler Co.



2.11

A.

4. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.

a. Type: Ledge back. b. Size: 19 by 17 inches (483 by 456 mm) rectangular. c. Faucet Hole Punching: Three holes, 2-inch (SI-mm) centers. d. Faucet Hole Location: Top. e. Pedestal: Not required. f. Color: White. g. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops. h. Drain: Grid with offset waste.

KITCHEN SINKS

Kitchen Sinks:



3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one ofthe following: a. Eljer. b. Kohler Co. c. American Standard Companies, Inc. d. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Eljer. f. Dayton Products, Inc. g. Elkay Manufacturing Co. h. Just Manufacturing Company. i. Kohler Co. j. Moen, Inc.

4. Description: One-bowl, residential, counter-mounting, stainless-steel kitchen sink.

a. Overall Dimensions: see fixture schedule. b. Metal Thickness: 0.050 inch (l.3 mm). c. Bowl:

d. Dimensions: see fixture schedule.

e.

f. g.

h.

1) Drain: 3-1I2-inch (89-mm).

2) Location: Centered in bowl.

Sink Faucet: see fixture schedule.

Supplies: NPS 112 (DN 15) chrome-plated copper with stops. Drain Piping: NPS 1-112 (DN 40) chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.04S-inch- (l.lmm-) thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s). Disposer: See fixture schedule.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

INSTALLATION

Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

E. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

F. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

O. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

H. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

I. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that arl;) easy for people with disabilities to reach.

J. Install toilet seats on water closets.

K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

L. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

M. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

O. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink iflocation is not indicated.



3.2

3.3

3.4

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling perietrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

R. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

B.

CONNECTIONS


Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.




VerifY that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

Check that plumbing fixiures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. and components.

Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

PROTECTION

Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.




SECTION 22-4700

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

1.2

1.3

A.

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

C.

SUMMARY

This Section includes the following: l. Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-mounting water coolers. 2. Fixture supports.

SUBMITTALS


Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A1l7.!, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act".; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities.

NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. ARl Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style classifications.

E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARlIOlO, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARl's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.

F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants" for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refi'igerant unless otherwise indicated.

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 224700.1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

2.2

A.

B.

PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

Water Coolers:




a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation. d. Larco, Inc. e. Oasis Corporation. f. Sumoc Corp.

4. Description: Accessible, ARlI01O, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-mounting water cooler for adult-mounting height.

a. Cabinet: Bilevel with two attached cabinets and with bilevel skirt kit, all stainless steel.

b. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck. c. Control: Push bar. d. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with ball, gate, or globe valve. e. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead

reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate. f. Drain(s): Grid with NPS 1-114 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap

complying with ASME AI12.18.1. g. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air

cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistantmetal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.

1) Capacity: 8 gph (0.0084L1s) of 50 degF (10 deg C) cooled water from 80 deg F (27 deg C) inlet water and 90 deg F (32 deg C) ambient air temperature.

2) Electrical Characteristics: 1/5 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.

h. Support: Type II, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture SuppOlis" Article.

FIXTURE SUPPORTS


Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Josam Co. 2. MIT AB Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 224700-2


5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

C. Description: ASME AI12.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.

1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights. 2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three veliical uprights. 3. SuppOlis for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of steel

pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.l

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3.3

A.

APPLICATIONS

Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view.

INSTALLATION

Install off-floor suppOlis affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

CONNECTIONS

Connect fixtures with water supplies, traps, and risers, and with soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22470()'3


B.

c.

3.4

A.

3.5

A.

B.




Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 2. Report test results in writing.

ADmSTING

Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

Adjust water cooler temperature settings.


DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22470()'4


SECTION 230500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

1.3

A.

B.

C.

D.

SUMMARY

This Section includes the following: 1. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 2. Concrete bases. 3. Supports and anchorages.

DEFINITIONS

Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

Install HV AC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23050()'1


1.4

A.

1.5

A.

B.

C.

1.6

A.

B.

C.

1.7

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

CONCRETE BASES


1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on I8-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter ofthe base.


4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use suppOlied equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete



Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HV AC materials and equipment.

Field Welding: Comply with A WS D 1.1.

ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to suppOli, and anchor HV AC materials and equipment.

Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

GROUTING

Mix and install grout for HV AC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23050()'2


F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500-3


SECTION 23-0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

B. Certified TAB reports.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC orNEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB

as a TAB technician.

B. CertifY TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare celiified TAB reports. 2. CertifY that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BLANACING FOR HVAC 230593-1


C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect and Commissioning Authority.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

EXAMINATION

Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

Examine the approved submittals for HV AC systems and equipment.

Examine design data including HV AC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HV AC system and equipment controls.

Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HV AC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HV AC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

O. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HV AC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.



3.2

3.3

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

A.

B.

A.

Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HV AC equipment.

Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

PREPARATION

Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

l. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to

balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

l. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

l. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HV AC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IF) units.



3.4

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

L.

3.5

A.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

VerifY that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

Check for airflow blockages.

Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

VerifY that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. .

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as neal' the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.



3.6

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated airhandling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

A.

B.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

PROCEDURES FOR V ARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fun systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:



l. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal- unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record final fan-performance data.

C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the

static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed,

and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure

to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, repOli the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.



3.7

3.8

3.9

D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

A.

B.

A.

B.

C.

A.

1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow.

3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively

to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream fi'om terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

Motors, 112 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

I. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection -element rating.

Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. I. Measure flow through bypass.

PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

VerifY proper rotation of fans.

Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

Record compressor data.

PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COILS

Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

I. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow.



3.10

A.

3.11

A.

B.

3.12

A.

4. Air pressure drop. S. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

TOLERANCES

Set HV AC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent

REPORTING

Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HV AC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

FINAL REPORT

General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. S. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. S. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.



10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body ofrepOlis vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

3.13

A.

B.

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

ADDITIONAL TESTS

Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, peliorm additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




SECTION 23 0700

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

A.

B.

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Polyolefin. e. Polystyrene.

2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 3. Insulating cements. 4. Adhesives. 5. Mastics. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 9. Field-applied jackets. 10. Tapes. 11. Securements. 12. Corner angles.

Related Sections:

1. Division21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 4. Division33 Section "Underground Hydronic Energy Distribution" for loose-fill pipe

insulation in underground piping outside the building. 5. Division33 Section "Underground Steam and Condensate Distribution Piping" for loose-fill

pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of

VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings:

HVAC INSULATION 230700-1


D.

1.3

A.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type

of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Detail application offield-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type.


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

INSULA nON MATERIALS

Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTMC795.

Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. Cell-U -Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUP. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

HVAC INSULATION 23070()"2


2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Aliicle.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. KnaufInsulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.


a. Insulco, Division ofMFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 degF (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).



2.4




C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MlL-A-24179A, Type II, Class 1.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.


D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

A.

B.



2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of '80 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, SubpatiD (EPA Method 24).

MASTICS

Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to~ the following:

a. b. c. d. e. f.

Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-35. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40. Vimasco Corporation; 749.



2.5

A.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

SEALANTS

Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division oflTW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 degF (Minus 73 to plus 149 degC). 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 giL or less when


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

B.

PREPARATION

Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

HVAC INSULATION 23070G-S


C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

l. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs

from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect j acket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at2 inches (50 mm) o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

HVAC INSULATION 23070()'6


3.3

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

A.

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

MlNERAL-FIBER INSULA TION INSTALLATION

Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 112-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory - or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.

HVAC INSULATION 23070(}'7


3.4

3.5

B.

A.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (I50-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

FINISHES

Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: [Two] <Insert number> finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C.

D.

A.

B.

Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.



3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 6. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 7. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust. 8. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust. 9. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 10. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 11. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. 12. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

A.

B.

A.

B.

A.

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-112 inches (38 mm) thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m)] nominal density.

Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m)] nominal density

PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch (25 mm) thick.



3.10 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: [2 inches (50 mm) thick. END OF SECTION 230700



SECTION 230800

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The purpose of this section is to specify responsibilities of this Division in the commissioning process.

B. The systems to be commissioned are listed in Division 1, Section 0191 13.

C. Commissioning requires the participation of this Division to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. This Division shall be familiar with all parts of Division 1 and the commissioning plan issued by the CxA and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of this Division are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): 1. Include and itemize the cost of commissioning in the contract price. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal

data, commissioning documentation, O&M data and training. 3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate

the Cx process. 4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing

submittals of commissioned equipment. 5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual

submittals, to the CxA for development of start- up and functional testing procedures. a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,

operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CxA

b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process.

c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals. 6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment,

through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval. 7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation

and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.

8. Provide limited assistance to the CxA in preparing the specific functional performance test procedures as specified in the draft Construction Phase Commissioning Plan. Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 230800 - 1


9. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer's start-up procedures and the prefunctional checklists from the CxA for all commissioned equipment. Submit to CxA for review and approval prior to startup. Refer to Division 1 for further details on start-up plan preparation.

10. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions of the pre functional checklists for all commissioned equipment.

11. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CxA

12. Address current Construction Observer punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.

13. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

14. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CxA for specified equipment in Construction Phase Commissioning Plan. Assist the CxA in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary.

15. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CxA and AlE and retest the equipment.

16. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

17. Prepare red-line as-built drawings for all drawings and final as -builds for contractorgenerated coordination drawings.

18. Provide training of the Owner's operating personnel as specified. 19. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to

maintain the validity of the warranty. 20. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CxA,

according to the specifications. 21. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built

drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.

B. Mechanical Contractor. The responsibilities of the mechanical contractor, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 1. Provide startup for all HV AC equipment, except for the building automation control

system. 2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by:

a. Putting all HV AC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required.

b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB. c. Providing test holes in ducts and plenums where directed by TAB to allow

air measurements and air balancing. Providing an approved plug. d. Providing temperature and pressure taps according to the Construction

Documents for TAB and commissioning testing. 3. Install a PIT plug at each water sensor which is an input point to the control system. 4. List and clearly identify on the as- built drawings the locations of all air-flow stations. 5. Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing, flushing

and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate.

6. Notify the GC or CxA depending on protocol, when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, stmiup of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the GC or CxA, ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.



C. Controls Contractor. The commissioning responsibilities of the controls contractor, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 1. Sequences of Operation Submittals. The Controls Contractor's submittals of control

drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the specifications. If clarity from the Engineer is required for completion of the following requirements, the Controls Contractor shall submit requests for information to gain sufficient information to complete the following requirements: a. An overview narrative of the system (1 or 2 paragraphs) generally

describing its purpose, components and function. b. All interactions and interlocks with other systems. c. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the

building automation system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and what BAS points are control points and are adjustable.

d. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment. (Equipment manufacturers' stock sequences may be included, but will generally require additional narrative).

e. Provide detailed sequences for all control strategies, e.g., economizer control, optimum start/stop, staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc.

f. The sequences shall include (as applicable) start-up, warm-up mode, normal operating mode, unoccupied mode sequences, shutdown sequences, failure modes, capacity control sequences and equipment staging and temperature and pressure control: setbacks, setups, resets, etc., effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions, all alarms and emergency shut downs, and seasonal operational differences and recommendations.

g. Provide initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints and parameters that are typically set or adjusted by operating staff; and any other control settings or fixed values, delays, etc. that will be useful during testing and operating the equipment.

h. All sequences shall be written in small statements, each with a number for reference. For a given system, numbers will not repeat for different sequence sections, unless the sections are numbered.

2. Control Drawings Submittal a. The control drawings shall have a key to all abbreviations. b. The control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the

systems and each component. c. The schematics will include the system and component layout of any

equipment that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls.

d. Provide a full points list with at least the following included for each point: 1) Controlled system 2) Point abbreviation 3) Point description: (DB temp, airflow, etc.) 4) Display unit 5) Control point or setpoint: (Point that controls equipment and can

have its setpoint changed (OSA, SAT, etc.) 6) Monitoring point: (Point that does not control or contribute to the

control of equipment, but is used for operation, maintenance, or performance verification.)

7) Intermediate point: (Point whose value is used to make a calculation which then controls equipment (space temperatures that are averaged to a viIiual point to control reset».

8) Calculated point: ("Virtual" point generated from calculations of other point values.)



e. The Controls Contractor shall keep the CxA informed of all changes to this list during programming and setup.

3. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal.

4. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor in the following manner: a. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB

plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB. Provide the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting terminal unit boxes and instruct TAB in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.).

b. For a given area, have all required prefunctional checklists, calibrations, startup and selected functional tests of the system completed and approved by the CxA prior to TAB.

c. Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system without assistance.

5. Assist and cooperate with the CxA in the execution of the functional testing of the controls system, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment and trend logs as specified in the Construction Phase Commissioning Plan.

6. The controls contractor shall provide a signed and dated certification to the CxA and GC upon completion of the checkout of each controlled device, equipment and system prior to functional testing for each piece of equipment or system, that all system programming is complete as to all respects of the Contract Documents, except functional testing requirements.

7. List and clearly identify on the as-built duct and piping drawings the locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building pressure).

D. TAB Contractor. The duties ofthe TAB contractor, in addition to those listed above are: 1. Six weeks prior to stmiing TAB, submit to the GC the qualifications of the site

technician for the project, including the name of the contractors and facility managers of recent projects the technician on which was lead. The Owner will approve the site technician's qualifications for this project.

2. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the CxA, GC and the controls contractor six weeks prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system.

3. The submitted plan will include: . a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction

documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.

b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The controls contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.

c. All field checkout sheets and logs to be used that list each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.

d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process.

e. Final test report forms to be used. f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue:

terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser proportioning, branch / sub-main propOliioning, total flow calculations, rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc. Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors will be discussed. Provide the analogous explanations for the water side.

g. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.



h. Details of how total flow will be determined (Air: sum of terminal flows via BAS calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. Water: pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.).

i. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date.

j. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this.

k. Confirmation that TAB understands the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions.

I. Details of whether and how minimum outside air cfm will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.).

m. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity will be checked.

n. Proposed selection points for any specified sound measurements and sound measurement methods.

o. Details of methods for making any specified coil or other system plant capacity measurements.

p. Details of any TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.), or of areas to be built out later.

q. Details regarding specified defeITed or seasonal TAB work. r. Details of any specified false loading of systems to complete TAB work. s. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including

any required room pressure differentials. t. Details of any required interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements

and calculations. u. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or

uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency).

v. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency). w. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).

4. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians. Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient 'or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA and GC at least twice a week.

5. Communicate in writing to the controls contractor all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect the control system setup and operation.

6. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to the CxA. The repOli will contain a full explanation of the methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The repOli should follow the latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, NEBB or ASHRAE Standard Ill.

7. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft repOlis.

8. Provide a final TAB repOli for the CxA with details, as in the draft. 9. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as specified

for TAB in the Construction Phase Commissioning Plan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITTALS



A. This Division shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in Division 1.

3.2 STARTUP

A. The mechanical and controls contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1. This Division has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the commissioning Authority or Owner.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the CxA and Gc. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all prefunctional checklists as soon as possible.

3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

A. The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications. 1. This Division shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and

systems covered in this Division and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this section and Division 1, prior to the training of owner personnel.

2. The CxA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.

B. Systems Concepts and Operations Manual that consists of the following: Owner Objectives (by owner); Design Narrative and Basis of Design (by designer); Performance metrics, if completed during design; space and use descriptions, single line drawings and schematics for major systems (by designer); control drawings, sequences of control (by contractor); and a table of all set points and implications when changing them, schedules, instructions for operation of each piece of equipment for emergencies, seasonal adjustment, staltup and shutdown, instructions for energy savings operations and descriptions .of the energy savings strategies in the facility, recommendations for re-commissioning frequency by equipment type, energy tracking recommendations, and recommended standard trend logs with a brief description of what to look for in them (all by (CP)).

C. Special Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation that may be specified elsewhere, the controls contractor shall compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system in labeled 3-ring binders with indexed tabs. 1. Three copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the O&M

manuals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing:

a. Specific instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other features of this system. These instructions shall be step-by -step. Indexes and clear tables of contents shall be included. The detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms shall be included.

b. Full as-built set of control drawings (refer to Submittal section above for details).

c. Full as- built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment. d. Full points list In addition to the updated points list required in the original

submittals (Palt 1 of this section), a listing of all rooms shall be provided with the following information for each room:

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 230800·6


1) Floor 2) Room number 3) Room name 4) Air handler unit ill 5) Reference drawing number 6) Air terminal unit tag ill 7) Heating andlor cooling valve tag ill 8) Minimum cfin 9) Maximum cfm

e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system.

f. Full as-built print out of software program. g. Electronic copy on disk ofthe entire program for this facility. h. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and

mechanical drawings with their control system designations. i. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and

methods by sensor type, etc. j. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc. k. Warranty requirements. \. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor

(not commissioning tests). 3. The manual shalI be organized and subdivided with permanently labeled tabs for

each ofthe following data in the given order: a. Sequences of operation b. Control drawings c. Points lists d. ControlIer I module data e. Thermostats and timers f. Sensors and DP switches g. Valves and valve actuators h. Dampers and damper actuators i. Program setups (software program printouts)

4. Field checkout sheets and trend logs should be provided to the CxA for inclusion in the Commissioning Record Book.

D. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Specifications. 1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test

conditions and the results in a clear format with designations of alI uncommon abbreviations and column headings.

2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.

E. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall be made by the AlE and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1.

3.4 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

A. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. Refer to Division 1 for additional details.

B. The CxA shalI be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. Refer to Division 1 for additional details.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 230800·7


C. Training manuals. The standard operating manual for the system and any special training manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M manuals. In addition, copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during training and three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals shall include detailed description of the subject matter for each session. The manuals will cover all control sequences and have a definitions section that fully describes all relevant words used in the manuals and in all software displays. Manuals will be approved by the CxA. Copies of audiovisuals shall be delivered to the Owner.

D. Mechanical Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training

according to the outline described in Division 1. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in

the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HV AC equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, boilers, furnaces, chillers, heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, terminal units, controls and water treatment systems, etc.

3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including staliup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.

4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training.

6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.

7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.

8. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction

material included in the O&M manuals. b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper

operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.

c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of

all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. h. The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process,

ASHRAE Guideline 0 is recommended. i. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides,

video/audio-taped material as might be appropriate.



E.

9. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment.

10. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system.

11. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Project Manager.

Controls Contractor. responsibilities:

The controls contractor shall have the following training

1. Provide the CxA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training. 2. The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the

control system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all the capabilities of the control system.

3. The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees. 4. The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. For the

on-site sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be used. The Owner shall approve the instructor prior to scheduling the training.

5. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.

3.5 DEFERRED TESTING

A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the PM. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties will be negotiated.

B. Seasonal Testing. During the warranty period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to the system's design) shall be completed as part of this contract. The CA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builds due to the testing will be made.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 23 0900

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1- GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HV AC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. Controls system shall have fuB remote read and write capability. Controls Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's Controls and IT personal.

C. General Contractor is responsible for a complete operable controls system. General Contractor shall vet bids between Mechanical Contractor, Controls Contractor, and Electrical Contractor to insure there are no scope gaps between disciplines.

D. Controls Contractor and Mechanical Contractor shal1 coordinate available control points thru the VRV System.

E. Controls Contractor is responsible for al1 sensors, transformers, wire, conduit, actuators, translators, and all other devices for a fully working controls system.

F. See M-501 for Control Points and additional Controls Information.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. PID: PropOliional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.04 DESCRIPTION

A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and operator workstation(s). The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) including a color monitor,

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-- 1


mouse and keyboard. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system though dynamic color graphics of building areas and systems.

B. The Controls Contractor shall provide a complete controls system. All low voltage power, conduit, transformers, relays, sensors, actuators, programming, interfacing with the existing owners DDC system, etc. shall be provide and installed by the Controls Contractors. Controls Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor and Electrical Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible for verifying complete coordination between subcontractors and providing a full operable system.

C. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of systems defined for control on this project.

D. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log onto any wOlkstation of the control system and have access to all designated data.

E. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under standalone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment.

F. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or network communications card shall be provided to for remote access to the system.

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following:

1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic points with current data displayed within 20 seconds of the request.

2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with cur~ent data within 30 seconds.

3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be 10 seconds. Analog objects shall stmi to adjust within 10 seconds.

4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or wOlkstation will be current, within the prior 60 seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.



8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other.

9. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values reported by the specified system.

Table 1

Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

~ace Temperature ±0.5°C [±I°F]

Ducted Air ±l.O°C [±2°F]

Outside Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]

Water Temperature ±0.5°C [±l OF]

Delta-T ±0.15°C[±0.25°F]

Relative Humidity ±5%RH

WaterFlow ±5% of full scale

Air Flow (terminal) ± 1 0% of reading *Note 1

Air Flow (measuring stations) ±5% of reading

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]

Air Pressure (SQace) ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.]

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale *Note 2

Electrical Power ± 5% of reading *Note 3

Refrigerant Concentration ± 15 PPM

Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%)

Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure

Note 3: * not including utility supplied meters

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900- 3


1.06

A.

B.

C.

D.

SUBMITTALS

Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxffile formats.

Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.

Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed.

Submit the following within 60 days of contract award:

1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number.

2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.

3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer and model number.

4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include:

a) Building Controllers

b) Custom Application Controllers

c) Application Specific Controllers

d) Operator Interface Computer(s)

e) Portable Operator Workstation

f) Auxiliary Control Devices

g) Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling

h) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled

i) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names

j) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project



k) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display

E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (asbuilt) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include:

1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.

3. Operating and Maintenance (0 & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the 0 & M manual shall include:

a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each.

b) Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables.

c) Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor.

d) Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.

e) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided.

f) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project.

g) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors.

h) Complete original issue media for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.

i). Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.

j) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions.

F. Training Materials: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training material for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.




A. System Installer Qualifications

1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years.

2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.

3. The installer shall have an office within [50] miles of the project site and provide [24-hour] response in the event of a customer call.

l.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

A. Warrant all work as follows:

I. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours.

2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifYing that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty.

3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes.

4. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.

1.09 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the propeliy of the Owner. These items include but are not limited to:

I. Project graphic images

2. Record drawings

3. Project database

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROl FOR HVAC 230900-- 6


4. Project-specific application programming code

5. All documentation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

1. A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.


2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers:

1. The above list of manufacturers applies to operator workstation software, controller software, the custom application programming language, Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers. All other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.

a. Automated Logic

b. Trane

c. Alerton

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by pointand-click graphics.

2.03 DDC EQUIPMENT MATERIALS

A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner's representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion ofthis contract

B. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 pOliS, integrated Intel Pro 10/1 00 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.



2. Processor: Intel Pentium 1033 MHz.

3. Random-Access Memory: 2.0 GB.

4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 256-MB video memory, with TV out.

5. Monitor: 19 inches LCD color.

6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.

7. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB.

8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48.

9. Mouse: Three button, optical.

10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.

11. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access.

a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalinklphysicallayer protocol.

12. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:

a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.

b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.

c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.

2.04 COMMUNICATION

A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet for communications between Building Controllers and PC Workstations. The Owner wiII provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the internetwork. An active 1 OBaseT jack wiII be provided adjacent to each Building Control Panel and PC Workstation for connection to this network.

B. All Building ControlIers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. This may be either a network interface node for connection to the Ethernet network or an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection.

C. Remote operator interface via a 56K baud modem shall allow for communication with any and all controllers on this network as described in the foIlowing paragraph.

D. Communications services over the internetwork shaIl result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as foIlows:

a. Connection of an operator interface device to anyone building controIler on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other building controIlers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all building controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from anyone building controller on the internetwork.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROl FOR HVAC 230900- 8


E.

2.05

A.

B.

b. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of anyone building controller shall be readable by any other building controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform internetwork value passing.

The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily.

OPERATOR INTERFACE

PC based workstations as shown on the system drawings. Each workstation shall be able to access all information in the system. Workstations shall reside on the same high-speed network as the building controllers, and also be able to dial into the system.

Hardware. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following:

a. Personal Computer. Furnish IBM-compatible PCs to be used as DDC system workstation. The CPU shall be a minimum of an Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 64 processor and operate at a minimum 2.2 GHz. Include a minimum 512 Megabytes of RAM, 48X CD ROM drive, 80 Gigabyte hard disk, and two-button mouse. Furnish all required serial, parallel, and network communication ports, and all cables for proper system operation. The PC shall include a minimum 17", color monitor with 1 024 x 768 screen resolution.

b. Modems. Furnish auto-dial telephone modems and associated cables as required for communication to remote buildings, and workstations. The modem shall be capable of transmitting at up to 56K baud, and communicate over voice-grade telephone lines.

C. System Software

1. Operating System. Furnish a commercially available, concurrent multi -tasking operating system. Acceptable operating systems are Microsoft Windows XP Professional.

2. System Graphics. The Operator Workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while the system is on line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation of equipment. Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of images reflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper positions (VI7). Graphics shall be capable oflaunching other PC applications.

3. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of commonly available graphics packages such as Corel Paint Shop Pro. The graphics generation package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as BMP, GIF and JPEG.

4. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HV AC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators, including 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional graphic depictions. The library shall include a minimum of 300 such files available for use by the Owner. This library shall also include standard graphical representations of



equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program.

5. Engineering Units. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or SI) in the system. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the desired units for each measurement. Engineering units on this project shall be Inch Pound [SI].

D. System Applications. Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation.

1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database for that panel.

2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system.

3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices, and assign modems to devices. This shall allow for future system changes or additions.

4. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen.

5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator's access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.

6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

7. Alarm Notification. Alarm messages shall use full language, easily recognized descriptors for alarm. System shall allow the user to have up to 10 popup windows appear for incoming alarms. The popup dialog shall allow the user to silence and acknowledge alarms, view an expanded message or graphic, and add and save comments for the alarm.

8. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system.

9. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be taken, by object, during an alatm. Actions shall include logging, printing, start a custom control



program, displaying messages, dialing out to remote workstations, paging or text message to a cell phone, forwarding to an e-mail address, providing audible annunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified alarm receipt device. For text messaging, the system shall support TAP protocol including parities 7-E-l and 8-n-l, such that if the system fails to dial out/connect with one parity it will automatically try the other one.

10. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms fium events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 5 color-coded categories based on Owner preference (VI7). Include an alarm count summary for each alarm category on the system toolbar. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. Provide a comment field in the event log that allows a user to add specific comments associated with any alarm.

11. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a trend log for any data in the system. This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of30 seconds,l, 5, 15,30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once a week, and once a month shall be selectable. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64 system objects. The system operator shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the workstation hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed fium the operator interface software. Trends must be viewable in a text-based format or graphically. Trends shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages.

12. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 10 points on a chart, to include live and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color, and include on-graph icons that represent associated events/alarms, manual overrides, and automated changes that have occurred over the time frame represented on the chart. Navigation and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and a trace display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the x-axis. Trend data shall be able to be stored for up to 10 years on the PC workstation.

13. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.

14. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building controllers and workstations shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to automatically synchronize all system clocks; daily fi'om any operator designated device in the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable.

15. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. RepOlis and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator shall be able to designate reports that shall be printed or stored to disk at selectable intervals. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.



a) Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These repOlis shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a repOli title.

b) Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for this project. These reports shall be readily customized to the project by the owner.

I. Electrical Meter RepOli: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an annual (12 month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak demand for each meter.

ii. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand repOli showing all current alarms.

iii. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides in effect.

iv. Schedule Report: Provide a summary of all schedules including Holiday and Exception schedules.

v. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time repOli that lists all equipment with the unit configuration and present operation.

vi. Gas Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily natural gas consumption for each meter. Provide an annual (12 month) report that shows the monthly consumption for each meter.

vii. Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly repOli showing the daily minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature and the number of heating and cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12 month) repOli showing the minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature for the month and the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month.

E. Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall suppOli dedicated screens for editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels.

l. Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type custom application, and application specific controller that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and system set-points.

2. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several related objects to follow a schedule. An advance and delay time for each object shall be adjustable from this master schedule. An operator shall be able to modifY the schedule. Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates.

3. Manual Control and Override. Provide a means of manually controlling analog and binary output points. Control overrides shall be performed through a simple, graphical on-off-auto editor for binary points, and auto-manual selector for analog control. Provide a icon indicator of override status when a point, unit controller or application has been overridden manually.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROl FOR HVAC 230900--12


2.06

A.

B.

4. Air System Equipment Coordination. Provide editor screens with monitoring and control functions that group together and coordinates the operation of air handling equipment and associated VA V boxes as specified in the sequence of operations. For each air system, the editor pages shall include:

a) System mode of the air handling system

b) Listing and assignment of the associated air handler and V A V boxes

c) AHU supply air cooling and heating setpoints

d) ABU minimum, maximum and nominal static pressure setpoints

e) VA V box minimum and maximum flow, and drive open and close overrides

APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE

Furnish the foHowing applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation.

System Security

1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager.

3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.

4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shaH be user definable.

C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10] events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.

2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week.

3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period.

4. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The



D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

2.07

A.

algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit.

Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to existing RISD network Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, cell phones and alphanumeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet communications, or dial up communications via modem, in the same format and method used on site as described under the Operator Interface section of this specification.

PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.

Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the wOlxstation.

Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts shall be usel'-selectable.

System Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. KW), flow rates (e.g. Lis [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window KW demand value. Provide an algorithm that calculates energy usage and weather data (heating and cooling degree days). These items shall all be available for daily, previous day, monthly and the previous month.

Anti-Sholi Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

BUILDING CONTROLLERS

General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this divisIOn. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.

1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand public

2. alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section.

2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.

3. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of the Portable Operators Terminal.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900--14


B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

2.08

A.

4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.

6. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.

7. The Building Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for communication to unit controllers.

8. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:

a) Assume a predetermined failure mode.

b) Generate an alarm notification.

c) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the failure.

d) Automatically reset the Building Controller to return to a normal operating mode.

Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet internetwork using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform routing to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers.

Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at 32 F to 120 F.

Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The Building Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. The primary logic board shall be removable without disconnecting field wiring.

Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage

CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.

1. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.

2. Contmllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.



3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.

4. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode, and generate an alarm notification.

B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

C.

D.

E.

2.09

A.

1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32 F to 120 F.

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 F to 158 F.

Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.

Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.

APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve.

1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network.

2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.

B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 32 F to 120 F.

2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 F to 150 F.

C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.

D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-" 16


E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.

F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

O. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using BACNet. Controllers shall use FTT-I0 transceivers. All communications shall follow BACNet profiles. ASCs which do not have a profile that applies must comply with BACNet standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation.

2.10 2.10 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

O.

2.11

A.

Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers.

All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller.

Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting cu\'\'ent of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices.

Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary Input points, and also accept up to 3 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.

Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 V dc), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control

Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output device

AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with reinforced cornel' bracing.

2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROl FOR HVAC 230900--17


4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" w.c. differential pressure.

5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.

6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.

B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.

C. Electric damper/valve actuators.

1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.

2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.

3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 rna control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 rna operating range.

5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections.

7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.

8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque.

D. Control Valves

1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service as scheduled or shown.

2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:

a) Water Valves:

i. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.

II. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head.

b) Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.



E. Binary Temperature Devices

1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (SSOF-8S0F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellowsactuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (SSOF -8S0F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.

3. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

F. Temperature Sensors

1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.

2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of l.5m [S feet] in length.

3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.

4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the drawings.

S. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].

6. [Optional] The space temperature, setpoint, and override confirmation will be annunciated by a digital display for each zone sensor. The setpoint will be selectable utilizing buttons.

G. Static Pressure Sensors

1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.

2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus SO% greater than calibrated span without damage.

3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of ISO psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.

4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of ISO psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.

H. Low Limit Thermostats

1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by anyone foot section.



2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.

1. Flow Switches

1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unless otherwise specified:

3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snapacting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.

4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.

J. Relays

1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

K. Transformers and Power Supplies

1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.

2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. CUll'ent output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.

3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C.

4. Unit shall be UL recognized.

L. Current Switches

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.

M. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS

1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.

2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with colorcoded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per con-

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900- 20


trollinterlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

3. Provide onloff power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

1.

J.

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

3.02

A.

B.

SECTION INCLUDES:

Examination

Protection

General Workmanship

Field Quality Control

Wiring

Fiber Optic Cable

Installation of Sensors

Flow Switch Installation

Actuators

Warning Labels

Identification of Hardware and Wiring

Controllers

Programming

Cleaning

Training

Acceptance"

EXAMINA TION

The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

The contractor shall inspect the site to verifY that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.



3.03

A.

B.

3.04

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.05

A.

B.

c.

3.06

A.

B.

C.

PROTECTION

The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry offoreign objects.

GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

VerifY integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.

Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.

Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

WIRING

All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 16, the requirements ofthis section shall take precedence.

Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:

Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)



D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

1.

1.

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

3.07

A.

B.

All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.

Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).

Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.

All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.

All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.

Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.

Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 stalier enclosures.

Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.

Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway.

This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wmng and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 112" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used.

FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM

All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Minimum cable and unjacketed fibber bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.

Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation. Post installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacture's specifications.



c.

3.08

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

3.09

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.10

A.

Fiber optic cabinets, hardware, and cable entering the cabinet shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.

INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.

Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down -stream of air flow.

Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.

Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms.

Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.

FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

Install and adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

Assure correct flow direction and alignment.

Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.

ACTUATORS

Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.

1. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.



3.11

A.

3. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.

WARNING LABELS

Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the DDC System. Waming label shall indicate the following:

CAUTION

This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off' position before servicing.

B. Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following:

CAUTION

3.12

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.13

A.

This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects.

Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

Identify control panels with minimum l-cm (112") letters on nameplates.

Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

CONTROLLERS

Provide a separate Controller for each major piece ofHV AC equipment. A custom application controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement.



B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of [15%] spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, [15%] of each type is required. Ifoutputs are not universal, [15%] of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used.

3.14

A.

B.

C.

1. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.

PROGRAMMING

Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.

Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.

Software Programming

1. Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.

D. Operators'Interface

E.

3.15

A.

1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, V A V Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the points list.

2. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, stali-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation ofthe operator interface.

3. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of [16] hours on-site. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative.

Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.

CLEANING

This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been re-



B.

C.

3.16

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

3.17

A.

moved. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.

At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equi pment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.

At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factOlY finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

TRAINING

Provide a minimum of 4 classroom training sessions, 4 hours each, throughout the contract period for personnel designated by the Owner. Computer-based audio-visual training may be substituted for up to 8 hours of hands on training.

Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.

Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or more ofthese, depending on the level of knowledge required:

1. Day-to-day Operators

2. Advanced Operators

3. System Managers/Administrators

Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide one copy of training material per student.

The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.

Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the installed hardware or at the customer's site.

This training shall be made available in addition to the interactive audio-visual tutorial, provided with the system.

ACCEPTANCE

The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be pelformed as part of the warranty.

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS

CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION



A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with sheet metal design.

B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 114" larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ± 1/8".

D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)

F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.

H. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.

I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS

DUCT SMOKE DETECTION

A. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke detector interface to HV AC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HV AC equipment to be controlled.




SECTION 23 1123

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Service meters. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Grout. 9. Concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment roOlps, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig.

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123-1


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected

models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Dielectric fittings. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Escutcheons.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 114 inch per foot. 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure

regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas plpmg' and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

G. Welding celiificates.

H. Field quality-control reports.

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D l.l1D1. 1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utilitylocating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the foIIowing conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and staIiup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural- gas service without Architect's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME BI6.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B 16.39, Class 150, maIIeable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.



d. Gasket Materials: ASME BI6.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18 .2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

I) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.

b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel

pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped

with anode.


A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.7S. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y -Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.



4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

D. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTMA 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig .

E. T -Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig .

F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS DI0.12/DI0.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B 16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME Bl.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASMEB1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked

on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASMEBI6.38.



1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASMEBI6.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-II0.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-

1/2 and larger.

B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.



a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. d. Invensys. e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.



4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve

port. 7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure

inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150

percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.



a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc.

3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 9. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123-7


4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or

welded end connections that match piping system materials.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each sealing element.

2.9 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening.

2.10 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 112308


inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.l EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises 01' piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to UPC to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with UPC requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with UPC for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTMD 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.



1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


J. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HV AC Piping."

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with UPC for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

1. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type. d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished chrome-plated finish.



e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

M. Verity final equipment locations for roughing-in.

N. Comply with requirements in Sections specitying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

R. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas plpmg, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete' slabs with minimum of 1-112 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or paIiitions.

S. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

T. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123·11


U. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

V. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

W. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

X. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HV AC Piping."

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B 1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading

is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWSD10.12/D10.l2M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and

where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas servIce. Install gasket concentrically positioned.



G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J 513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.

H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTMD 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for BV AC Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-112 to NPS 3-112: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 112 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility'S procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appli'ances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HV AC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below sub grade under pavements and slabs.

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123·13


3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal plpmg, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, emihquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT S.lD.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat. d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal plpmg, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPIINT S.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex flat. d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to UPC and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective ifit does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain emihquake valves.

3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:



1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS TRANO.S PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping.

2. Annealed-temper, tin-lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought- steel fittings and welded joints.

D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

END OF SECTION 23 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 231123·15


SECTION 23-2300

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-22:

B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa). 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig (3689 kPa).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.

E. Variable Refrigerant Volume Training Certificates - Specific for the proposed system Manufacture -For each installer

F. Compression Fitting Training Certificates - Specific for the proposed system Manufacture - For each installer

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23230()'1



A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.


Copper Tube: ASTMB 88, TypeK or L (ASTMB 88M, Type A or B)

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME BI6.22.

Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95 -5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.

Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8.

Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment in minimum 7-

inch- (180-mm-) long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig(3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 degC).

2.2 ALUMINUM TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Seamless Aluminum: ASTM B210 & ASTM B31.5. 1. Joints must be made without the use of heat. 2. Joints must be tested and certified per UL-207. 3. Provide dielectric coating between dissimilar metals. 4. Fittings shall be certified to a working pressure of 600 psi.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.



2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig (3.4 kPa). 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 degC).

D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring: 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).

E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARl 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with

II2-inch (I6-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24V coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C). 8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.



3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARl750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig (3100 kPa).

H. Straight- Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion- resistant coating. 2. Screen: IOO-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

I. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: IOO-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter

screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

K. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 114 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement. 6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa)



7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

L. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARl 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 114 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement. 6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

M. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARl495.

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PlPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRlGERANT R-41 OA

A. Suction Lines NPS 3/4 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

B. Suction Lines NPS 4 and SmalIer for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type L , drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines:

1. NPS 5/8 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wroughtcopper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

2. NPS 4 and Smaller: Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings Alloy HB soldered joints.

D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

E. Suction Lines NPS 4 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Seamless Aluminum tubing and steel mechanically compressed fittings.

F. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines:

G. NPS 4 and Smaller: Seamless Aluminum tubing and steel mechanically compressed fittings.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23230()'S


3.3

B. Install service valves for gage taps at strainers if they are not an integral part of strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not

mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safetyrelief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

1. Install moisturelliquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected:

K.

L.

A.

B.

C.

1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Compressor.

Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.

Install flexible connectors at compressors.

PIPING INSTALLATION

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 230()'6


3.4


F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install piping as ShOli and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal pmis of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.

Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping. "

R. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

S. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

T.

u.

A.

Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods.

Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HV AC Piping and Equipment."

PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."



3.5

3.6

B. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D. Tests and Inspections:

A.

A.

B.

C.

D.

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety

devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of

soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

SYSTEM CHARGING

Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If

vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14 kPa). 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

ADJUSTING

Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23230(}'8



REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-9


SECTION 23-3113

DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Underground FRP Ductwork. 4. Sheet metal materials. 5. Duct liner. 6. Sealants and gaskets. 7. Hangers and supports. 8. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HV AC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.

3. Division 23 Section "HV AC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

4. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48. 2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30. 3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

DUCTWORK 233113-1


1.3

A.

B.

SUBMITTALS


Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and statio-pressure classes. 4. Elevation oftop of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints,

and vibration isolation.

C. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HV AC System Construction and Insulation."

3. Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."

4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up."

5. Product Data for CreditEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers ofthe items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

DUCTWORK 233113-2


c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

2.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HYAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HY AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HY AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HYAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated staticpressure class unless otherwise indicated.

l. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HY AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

l. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm): Flanged.

DUCTWORK 23 3113-3


2.3

2.4

C.

D.

A.

B.

Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

SHEET METAL MATERIALS

General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (ZIS0)

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 100S/A 100SM, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 4S0lA 4S0M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No.2B, No. 2D, No.3, or No.4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTMA 36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G.

A.

l. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, lI4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/S-inch (lO-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC - FRP

Underground ductwork sill be factory pre-insulated including all fitting. The FRP ductwork r rCBO and BOC listed and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The insulation value of the duct I R-5.3 minimum.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

DUCTWORK 23 3113-4


2.5

A.

a. Spunstrand.

DUCT LINER

Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. KnaufInsulation. d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in.!h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 Wlm x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in.!h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 Wlm x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HV AC systems.

4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTMC916.

a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, O.l35-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-112-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-112 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1.

2. 3. 4.

Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. Apply adhesive to transverse edges ofliner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

DUCTWORK 233113-5


2.6

A.

B.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 ±pm (12.7 m/s).

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at interva,1s not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500

fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

SEALANT AND GASKETS

General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shaH be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermicaHy with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches (76 mm) 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: lO-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 degF (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel,

or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 giL or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, SubpartD (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. 2.

Application Method: Brush on. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

DUCTWORK 233113-6


2.7

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 gIL (less water). 7. Maximum Statio-Pressure Class: lO-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel,

or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Singlt}-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of250 giL or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/lOO sq. ft. at I-inch wg (0.14 Lis per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for lO-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and

fitting spigots.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods' and nuts.

Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

DUCTWORK 233113-7


2.8

A.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO; a brand of NIB CO INC. 8. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated suppOli assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmiumplated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

DUCT INSTALLATION

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

DUCTWORK 233113-8


3.2

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J.

K.

A.

B.

Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior paliitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

DUCT SEALING

Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7. 8. 9.

10.

11. 12.

Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-lnch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class C. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal ClassB. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

DUCTWORK 233113-9


3.3

3.4

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

F.

A.


Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and SuppOlis."

Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs

more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.

Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel suppOlis.

Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of16 feet (5 m).

Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

SEISMIC-RESTRAINT -DEVICE INST ALLA TION

Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of80 feet (24 m) o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

DUCTWORK 233113-10


3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

A.

B.

A.

A.

A.

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

CONNECTIONS

Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

DUCT CLEANING

Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

STARTUP

Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing forHVAC."

DUCT SCHEDULE

Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Underground Ducts: Fiber-Glass Re-enforced Plastic as manufactured by Spunstrand.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units

a. Pressure Class: Positive I-inch wg (250 Pa) b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12

2. Ducts Connected to Variabl5-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. b. c.

Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3.

DUCTWORK 233113·11


d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3.

C. Return Ducts:

I. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative I-inch wg (250 Pa). h. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative I-inch wg (250 Pa). h. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.


ADDED IN ADDEMDUM : All underground ductwork will be cleaned after construction. A video camera will then scope the entire length of all the underground ductwork. The video shall be recorded and turned over to the owner for review. Any deficiencies will need to be repaired at no extra cost to the owner.

DUCTWORK 233113-12


SECTION 23-3300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

l.2

1.3

A.

A.

B.

SUMMARY

Section Includes:

l. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Fire Dampers 4. Control dampers. 5. Flange connectors. 6. Turning vanes. 7. Duct-mounted access doors. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Flexible ducts. 10. Duct accessory hardware.

SUBMITTALS


LEED Submittal:

l. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

D.

A.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted

access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1


B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (ZI80) 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No.2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, I-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, lI4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (lO-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

l. Air Balance Inc.; a division ofMestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division ofMestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Lloyd Industries, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Pottorff; a division of PC I Industries, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. SEMCO Incorporated. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300·2


2.3

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm (10 m/s).

D. Maximum System Pressure: I-inch wg (0.2S kPa).

E. Frame: 0.OS2-inch- (l.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners and mounting flange].

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch (ISO-mm) width, 0.02S-inch(0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

1. Blade Axles:

l. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (S mm).

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball

M. Accessories:

A.

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. S. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (l.O-mm) minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (1S2 mm) minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel 8. Screen Type: Bird 9. 90-degree stops.

MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

Standard, Steel, Locking Quadrant Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division ofMestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division ofMestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 3


f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff; a division of PC I Industries, Inc. h. Ruskin Company. \. Trox USA Inc. j. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles

full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Pottorff; a division of PC I Industries, Inc. 4. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (l-kPa) static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm (20-mls) velocity.

D. Fire Rating: See floor plan drawings and verify with architectural wall rating.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.l38 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick, as indicated, and oflength to suit application.



2.5

2.6

G.

H.

I.

J.

A.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, O.034-inch- (O.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, O.034-inch- (O.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

FLANGE CONNECTORS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following[available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on factOly-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C.

D.

A.

Material: Galvanized steel.

Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

TURNING VANES

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. MET ALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.



2.7

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

A.

DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

Manufacturers:· Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division ofMestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Pottorff; a division of PC I Industries: Inc. 9. Ventfabrics, Inc. 10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. b.

c. d. e.

Double wall, rectangular. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Vision panel. Hinges and Latches: I-by-l-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Fabricate doors ailiight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two

compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two

compression latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10-inch wg (2500 Pa).



2.8

A.

5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: l-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-112 inches (89 mm) wide attached to 2 strips of 2-314-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz.lsq. yd. (880 glsq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbflinch (84N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbflinch (63 N/mm) in the

filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 degF (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz.lsq. yd. (810 glsq. m). 2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbflinch (88 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbflinch (77 N/mm)

in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 degF (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C).

G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation

or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1I4-inch (6-mm) movement at

start and stop.



2.9

A.

FLEXffiLE DUCTS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 4. >.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film suppOlied by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-banier film.

1. Pressure Rating: lO-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C). 4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, R=4.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor- barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fPm (20 mls). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 79 deg C). 4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, R=4.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a wormgear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to suit duct size.

2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow inseliion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit ductinsulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct ConstlUction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.



B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

O. Install fire and Fire/Smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HV AC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. For fans developing static pressures of5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.



3.2

N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts[ directly or] with maximum [12-inch (300-mm)] <Insert value> lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts[ directly or] with maximum [60-inch (ISOO-mm)] <Insert value> lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with [adhesive] [liquid adhesive plus tape] [draw bands] [adhesive plus sheet metal screws].

Q.

R.

A.

Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1I4-inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop of fans.



1. Operate dampers to verifY full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verifY that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verifY full range of movement and verifY that proper heat

response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 ·10


SECTION 23-3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Fixed face registers and grilles.

B. Related Sections:

A.

1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specifi~d.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.l

A.

CEILING DIFFUSERS

Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers <Insert drawing designation>: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Carnes. d. Hart & Cooley Inc. e. Krueger. f. MET ALAIRE, Inc. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus .. j. Tuttle & Bailey.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713-1


2.2

A.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. S. Face Size: [indicated on drawings 6. Face Style: Three cone 7. Mounting: Surface and T-bar, (see drawings). 8. Pattern: Adjustable.

REGISTERS AND GRILLES

Fixed Face Grille <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carnes. b. Krueger. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus.

2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Arrangement: 1I2-by-112-by-1I2-inch grid core. S. Mounting: Concealed or Lay in.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

INSTALLATION

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

ADJUSTING

After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 3713-2


SECTION 23 7200

AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY SYSTEM

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1

l.2

1.3

1.4

A.

A.

A.

B.

A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

Section Includes: l. Packaged energy recovery units.


Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the effects of eatihquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply.

2. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.l-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

C. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

AIR TO AIR RECOVERY SYSTEM 23720()'1


1.5

1.6

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

l. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to

structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators[ and seismic restraints] and for designing vibration isolation bases.

E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.

F. Field quality-control reports.

O. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include III

maintenance manuals.

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

A.

B.

C.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

ARI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."

ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to recommendations of NRC A.

UL Compliance: Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."

COORDINATION

Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is suppOJied by them, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression system, and pmiition assemblies.

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment suppOJis, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

AIR TO AIR RECOVERY SYSTEM 23720(}'2


1. 7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years. 2. Warranty Period for Fixed-Plate Total Heat Exchangers:. 10 years.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filters: Two set(s) of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: Two set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan size in energy recovery units. 3. Wheel Belts: Two set(s) of belts for each heat wheel size.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

C.

PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carnes. 2. MicroMetl. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Venmar CES Inc.

Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum linch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.

1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

2. Inlet: Weatherproof [hood] [louver], with damper for exhaust and supply.

a. Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper. b. Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.

3. Roof Curb: Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment supports.

D. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.

E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal and insulated flexible duct connections.



1. Motor and Drive: belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable base. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HV AC Equipment."

3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

5. Spring isolators on each fan having I-inch static deflection.

F. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFP A 90A. 2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.l, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on

both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum. 4. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 5. Thickness: 2 inches. 6. Initial Resistance: 7. Recommended Final Resistance: 8. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 80. 9. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 5. 10. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 11. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged,

and with pull and retaining handles.

G. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFP A 90A. 2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on

both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum. 4. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type. 5. Thickness: 2 inches. 6. Initial Resistance: 7. Recommended Final Resistance: 8. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.l): 90. 9. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 7. 10. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire

grid. 11. Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard. 12. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for bolting

together into built-up filter banks.

H. Accessories:

1. Mounting Curb: Steel with gasketing, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.

2. Intake weather hood with 2-inch- thick filters. 3. Louvered intake weather hood with 2-inch - thick filters in V-bank configuration. 4. Exhaust weather hood with birdscreen. 5. Low-Leakage, Isolation Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade, extruded-aluminum dampers

with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in opposed -blade arrangement with steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted



2.2

A.

2.3

A.

in a single galvanized-steel frame, with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfmlsq. ft. at I-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

6. Isolation Dampers: Opposed-blade, extruded-aluminum dampers with steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel extrudedaluminum frame with operating rods connected with a common linkage, and electric damper operator factory wired. Provide blade gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten blades to operating rod.

7. Duct flanges. 8. Rubber-in-shear isolators for ceiling-mounted units. 9. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.

CONTROLS

As Shown on Contract Drawings.

CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

As Shown on Contract Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

A.

B.

EXAMINATION

Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofthe Work.

Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verifY actual locations of connections before installation.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

Install floor-mounted units on 4-inch- high concrete base[ designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by code].

Equipment Mounting: Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on I8-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

AIR TO AIR RECOVERY SYSTEM 237200-5


3.3

3.4

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

C. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment to structural support with anchor bolts.

D. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions. Wind and seismically restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HV AC Piping and Equipment."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn-temper copper water tubing with soldered joints, same size as condensate drain connection.

A.

B.

C.

A.

B.

1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:

a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 giL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

CONNECTIONS

Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.


Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

AIR TO AIR RECOVERY SYSTEM 23720()"6


D.

E.

3.5

A.

4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.




SECTION 2605 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2

1.3

1.4


SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-<iiene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

Common Work Results for Electrical 260500 - 1


B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masomy walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTMA 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Or Engineer approved equal.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.



2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3.2

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E.

A.

B.

C.

D.

Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, c~ble trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1I4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry



1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRES TOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fit·estopping."

....... END ......



SECTION 260519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently celtified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 1


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORD INA TION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19 - 2


2.3

2.4

C.

A.

A.

Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

SLEEVES FOR CABLES

Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

SLEEVE SEALS



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

B.

c.

CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

Feeders: Copper for feeders. Solid for No.1 0 A WG and smaller; stranded for No.8 A WG and larger.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 A WG and smaller; stranded for No.8 A WG and larger. No wire smaller than No. 12 A WG shall be permitted.

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MUL TICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; Metal-clad cable, Type MC for fixture whips only.



3.3

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

1. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

J.

K.

L.

A.

B.

Cord Drops and POliable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used . must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.



3.5

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C.

A.

B.

C.

D.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS




Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor 01' wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry [and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies].

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 5


M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Fit·estopping. "


A. Testing Agency: A qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NET A Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No.3 A WG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scmming: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.



b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a celiified repoli that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written repOli to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above .

....... END ......

Low-Voltage Electrical PowerConductors and Cables 2605 19 - 7


SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

B. The conduit systems and neutral conductors of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection of the electrical system, neutral ground wire system and conduit system shall be made at the main service device. The incoming cold water system, primary ground, neutral conduit system and metallic grounding system shall be bonded.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 1

ALBUQUERQUE HEAlTH CARE FOR THE HOMELESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

3. Bonding Conductor: Conductor size per the construction documents or as required by NEC Article 250.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. BoIted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two boIts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches (16 by 2400 mm) in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 A WG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 A WG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 A WG minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inches (750 mm) below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: BoIted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods: BoIted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.


ALBUQUERQUE HEAlTH CARE FOR THE HOMELESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. A void obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least two rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and SUPPOltS: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted com1ector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

E. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No.2 A WG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.




A. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kV A and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance .

....... END ......



SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART I-GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. !MC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 1


1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment suppOlis, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. h. Engineer approved equal.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supp0l1s: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Supp0l1 Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Veliical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or



cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 5) Engineer approved equal.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.


1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW RamsetlRed Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Engineer approved equal.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTMA 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.



B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 114 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other SUppOit system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these SUppOits with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with A WS Dl.l/Dl.lM, with lock washers

and nuts, beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69, or spring-tension clamps.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to SUppOit and anchor electrical materials and equipment.



C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.


2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and suppOlis. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780 .

...... END .....



SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. !MC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Aliicle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 2605 33- 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT /Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company. 10. Engineer approved equal.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.I.

C. !MC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast, compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. ManhattanlCDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.



12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Engineer approved equal.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. LFNC: UL 1660.

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREW A YS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. Engineer approved equal.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/ Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8; Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533- 3


14. Engineer approved equal.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: semi-adjustable, rectangular.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with vehicular traffic rating Tier 5. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient offriction ofO.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.



a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533- 4


d. NewBasis. e. Quazite f. Engineer approved equal.

2.6 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTMA 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.l38-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.7 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Engineer approved equal.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.l RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or !Me. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, !MC or EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.



3.2

6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbfverticalloading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or lMC. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or lMC.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

INSTALLATION

Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533-6


G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than I-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings:

3. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC to rigid steel conduit, IMC or EMT before rising above the floor.

1. Raceway Terminations at all locations: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use Tru-Tape pull strings with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Flexible Conduit COlmections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in all wet or damp locations.

L. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

M. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Eatih Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Eatih Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand-tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel wrapped conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. Conduit elbows installed in direct contact with the eatih shall be rigid galvanized steel, field-wrapped with one layer of 3M Scotch 50 plastic tape with a 50 percent overlap, including all joints or couplings, or shall be coated with a bonded, 20 mil minimum thickness, PVC, permanently fused at the factory, Pittsburgh Standard Co. "Plastibond" or approved equal.



3.4

3.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

A.

B.

C.

D.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits. Align warning tape along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from I/2-inch sieve to No.4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 24" below grade.

SLEEVE INST ALLA nON FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRA nONS




Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1I4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.



3.6

3.7

3.8

1. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

A.

B.

A.

A.

SLEEVE-SEAL INST ALLA TION

Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

FIRES TOPPING

Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fit·estopping."

PROTECTION

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

. ..... END ......



SECTION 2605 53

IDENTIFICA TION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

Identifications for Electrical Systems 260553·1


D. Install identifYing devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICA TION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

2.2 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically ineli, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destlUctive substances commonly found in soils.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

3. As directed by Architect and/or Engineer.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

Identifications for Electrical Systems 2605 53 - 2


B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic 01' Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding .

.!3. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, selflocking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM,D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior 01' interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

Identifications for Electrical Systems 260553 - 3


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 -foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identifY the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.



a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No.8 A WG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 2081120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film -type labels.

D. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in . finished spaces.

E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. .Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 112-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-II2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.



b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. I. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. Receptacles (on front of coverplate).

3. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pretensioned, snap-a-round, colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors: a. Fire Alarm System: Red b. Security Alarm Systems: Blue and Yellow c. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue d. Data System: Green and Yellow e. TV Systems: Green £ Sound/PA: Orange g. Telephone: Orange and Yellow h. 120/208V Power: Black i. 277 1480V Power: Blue j. 120/208V Emergency Power: Black and Orange k. 277/480V Emergency Power: Blue and Orange

4. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code-required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations or similar labels.

5. Use conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows under which conditions field applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded sire for sizes larger than No.1 0 A WG: a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a dis

tance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use l-inch- wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable



identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.

6. Tag or label conductors as follows: a. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or con

nection under another contract with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.

b. Multiple Circuits: Where mUltiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure, label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by means of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes.

c. Fiber Optic Cable and conduit: All fiber optic cable shall bear factory printed cable identification marking indicating the cable is "fiber optic". Install permanent ink markings indicating the words "fiber optic" on colored tape or tags to this effect on conduit runs containing fiber optic cable at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors (each side), at junction boxes and termination, and at 40 foot maximum intervals .

....... END ..... .



SECTION 2624 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panel boards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

Panelboards

Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and overcurrent protective devices. Include evidence ofNRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

2624 16 - 1


C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panel board) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panel boards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HV AC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

Panelboards

a. b.

Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F . Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

2624 16 - 2


B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's or Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINA nON

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion ..

1.1 0 EXTRA MA TERlALS


1. 2.

3.

4.

Pane1boards

Keys: Two spares for each type of panel board cabinet lock. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: See panel schedules on construction documents for each panelboard. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2624 16 - 3


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panel boards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R Gasketed or NEMA 4. c. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, NEMA 3R.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Double latch Door in Door Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. No Screws covers.

4. SkiJi for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor as per the construction documents.

5. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Per construction documents.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, sui table for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

Panelboards 262416-4


2.2

2.3

G.

H.

A.

Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

Panel board Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NR TL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NR TL.

DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 4. Eaton. 5. Engineer approved equal.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker, fused switch or lugs as per the construction documents.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

A.

1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. 2.

General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.



3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 4. Eaton. 5. Engineer approved equal.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

F. Door in Door Construction: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTNE DEVICES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 4. Eaton. 5. Engineer approved equal.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

4.

Panelboards

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and ft response.

Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

2624 16 - 6


5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with fieldadjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.

2.5 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or'comparable product by one of the following:

1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Liebert Corporation. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 6. Engineer approved equal.

B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62,41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

Panelboards

1. Accessories:

a. b. c.

Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. Integral disconnect switch.

2624 16 - 7


d. Redundant suppression circuits. e. Redundant replaceable modules. f. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. g. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. h. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. i. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

j. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase. 3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in

IEEE C62,41.2.

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEEC62,41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, threephase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y1120. b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. c. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

A.

B.

EXAM INA TION

Receive, inspect, handle, and store panel boards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

Examine elements and surfaces to receive panel boards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INST ALLA TION

Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Castin-Place Concrete."

Panelboards 2624 16 - 8


1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on I8-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panel board cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four I-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four I-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space 01' below slab not on grade.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. IdentifY field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panel board Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Panelboards 2624 16·9

ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE fOR THE HOMELESS fiRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

. ..... END .....



SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 6. Solid-state fan speed controls. 7. Communications outlets. 8. Pendant cord-connector devices. 9. Cord and plug sets. 10. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit intenupter.

C. Pigtail: Sh01i lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


Wiring Devicess 262726 - 1


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other PaIt 2 aIticles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. Engineer approved equal.

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. b. c. d. e.

Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). Engineer approved equal.



B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; 63H. e. Engineer approved equal.

3. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. c. Engineer approved equal.

2.4 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 1449, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles:





a. Cooper; 5362BLS. b. Hubbell; HBL5362SA. c. Leviton; 5380. d. Engineer approved equal.

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL231O. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. e. Engineer approved equal.

2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching extemal cable grip. .

2. Extemal Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being cOlmected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clampingjaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.8 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.



B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way). e. Engineer approved equal.

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V. e. Engineer approved equal.

3. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



a. Leviton; 1221-2L.

3. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.9 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMIiRFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.



1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. 2. As per construction documents.

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.1 0 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall or Ceiling Sensors:



a. Cooper b. Hubbell c. Leviton d. Pass & Seymour e. Watt Stopper (The) f. Engineer approved equal.

2.11 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof While In Use Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.l2 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.



2.13 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 01' device listing.

2. TVSS Devices: Blue.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick 01' block walls so that the covel' plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wal1.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring 01' nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.



3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 A WG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 A WG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi gang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICA nON

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine printing with black lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

. ..... END .....



SECTION 263100

PHOTOVOL TAle SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS:

A. The terms "Contractor" and "Provider" are used interchangeably throughout this specification.

B. Provider - Solar PV system subcontractor. This is a complete Design / Build System provided and instaUed by the PV system subcontractor. AU reference to "Provider" shall include designing, providing, and installing a complete Design / Build System for which the PV system subcontractor is fuUy responsible.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provider will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning ofthe complete and functioning PV system.

B. Provider will be responsible for alI cOlTesponding costs.

C. Provider will be responsible for al1 required engineering drawings and other documentation required for alI permits for construction of solar canopies and PV system; provider will be responsible for obtaining alI corresponding permits, except for the site permit that encompasses the overal1 facility project.

D. Provider will be responsible for aU engineering drawings, documentation, and procedures required by the Utility to complete the interconnection, commissioning and start- up of PV system. Provider will be responsible for all interconnection related costs.

E. Provider will work directly with Project Architect, General Contractor and Ro.ofer to plan and coordinate instaUation ofPV system with overall project.

F. Provider's project team must be certified and/or licensed to by appropriate local jurisdiction to design and construct the PV system. At minimum, this includes NM licensed PE's(professional engineers)and valid EE 98 contractor license.

G. Provider shall coordinate all inspections required for PV system installation.

H. Provider shall furnish all materials, tools, labor and equipment required for PV system completion at Provider's expense.

1. Provider shal1 supply the equivalent of an owners/operators manual, including maintenance instructions.

J. All work must meet all current applicable national and local building and electrical codes.

K. All work must meet OSHA requirements.

PHOTOVOL TAlC SYSTEM 26 310()' 1


1.3 PV SYSTEM DESIGN AND ENGINEERING:

A. PV system shall have at minimum: 1. 10 kW DC (STC) PV Array Rating. 2. 8 kW AC Total Invelier Output Rating

B. The PV System design shall follow conceptual desig~ specified in RFP drawings.

C. The PV System design shall follow PV module layouts on roof of building, as specified in RFP drawings.

D. The PV System design, engineering and installation shall in compliance with all applicable NEC and local code requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

Prepare and make five sets of submittals providing manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings indicating irrigation design (irrigation design shall correspond with planting design), and "cut sheets" on all controllers, heads, backflow preventers, valves, pumps and other equipment as required.

1.5 PV SYSTEM DESIGN AND ENGINEERING:

A. The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "record" drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes.

B. At the time of final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish a set of reproducible "record" drawings prepared by a qualified draftsperson showing the entire completed system as actually installed. This is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be construed to be the responsibility of any other party. This drawing shall be accurate and to scale. The symbols for valves, heads, and piping, etc. shall be described by a Legend. The legend shall also be modified to designate any "record" changes. The final drawings shall be dated and clearly labeled "RECORD DRAWING" ..

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

WIRING AND CONDUIT

All above ground wiring (other than module-to-module wiring) shall be in appropriate metallic conduit.

Module to module wiring shall be properly secured and managed for maximum longevity and a clean look. Use of zip ties to secure PV module cables is not allowed.

All underground wiring shall be in PVC Schedule 40 conduit.

All conduit and wiring materials and installation must meet all applicable code requirements.

All conduit, wiring and corresponding transition, strain relief and termination methods must be installed and completed using best practices to optimize aesthetics and maximize safety and longevity of all components.

2.2 PV MODULES

A. Must be UL listed

B. Must be CEC approved (link: http://www.gosolarcalifornia.orglequipment/pv_modules.php)

26 310()' 2 PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM


C. Minimum 250 Watt STC power rating.

D. Have positive only power tolerance.

E. Have minimum power output warranty of 80% .power at 25 years.

F. Must be identical (do not mix manufacturers or STC ratings).

G. Must be polycrystalline or monocrystalline technology.

H. Approved manufacturers: Canadian Solar, Hyundai, Trina or approved equal.

2.3 INVERTERS

2.4

A. Must be UL listed

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

1.

1.

A.

Must be CEC approved (link: http://www.gosolarcalifornia.orglequipment/inverters.php)

Nominal AC Output Voltage: 208 V AC, 3 phase

Nominal Output Frequency: 60 Hz

96% minimum peak efficiency

95% minimum CEC weighted efficiency

Power factor >0.99

Total Harmonic Distortion < 3%

Manufacturer's warranty: 10 years minimum

Approved manufacturers: ABB (Power-One), Solectria, SMA, or approved eq.ual.

ROOFTOP PV MODULE RACKING

All roof penetrations, racking and conduit supports to be installed in a manner that maintains roofing manufacturer's and roofer's warranties and prevents leaks. All roofing penetrations to be coordinated with general contractor and roofing subcontractor.

B. PV module racking to be made of materials that are adequately designed and engineered to support the system components as well as endure exposure to the elements and resist rust and corrosion.

C. To be designed specifically for rooftop PV module installation.

D. To be engineered to all locally applicable design criteria (applicable design wind load, snow load and Exposure category).

E. Approved manufacturers: Unirac or approved equal

2.5 PV SYSTEM MONITORING

A. Provide a web-based monitoring system that enables remote viewing of system performance, energy and power output data (numerical and graphical) on any web-enabled computer. (Network connection and

PHOTOVOL TAlC SYSTEM 26 310()' 3


internet service access to PV system, web-enabled computers, displays and kiosks to be provided by others.)

B. Provide Inverter-direct monitoring only.

C. Monitoring system must refresh monitored data automatically.

D. Include all hardware, software and monitoring service provider fees (if any) for 5-year term minimum, with option for Customer to extend monitoring service agreement after 5 years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCLUDED FROM PROVIDER'S PROPOSAL

A. Electric service entrance upgrades, if any are required to accommodate the addition of the PV system to the original scope of the overall facility project.

B. Utility required upgrades, if any (e.g. transformer upgrade).

3.2 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provider's licenses and certificates: Provider must be a licensed NM electrical contractor (EE 98) with at least three (3) consecutive years of active PV system installation experience.

3.3 Required experience

A. PV provider must have installed and commissioned successfully at least five (5)PV systems on commercial and/or government facilities in the most recent three (3) years ERECTION TOLERANCES.

3.4 PROPOSED PV SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. At minimum, include PV array power rating (kW DC STC), total inverter output capacity rating (kWAC), PV module, inverter and rooftop racking manufacturers and models.'

B. Datasheets and warranty documents for proposed PV modules, inverters, rooftop racking and roof attachments.

C. Provider's installation warranty document. Minimum 1 year installation workmanship warranty is required.

D. Proposed PV system preliminary I-line electrical diagram.

E. Proposed PV system preliminary site diagram indicating preliminary locations of major PV system components.

F. Proposer's turnkey pncmg for PV system to include all engineering, permitting, interconnection agreement, materials and labor to fully install, start-up and commission the PV system.

G. Any deviations from and/or exceptions to specifications presented in the RFP. Provide a clear explanation for each such deviation or exception.

END OF SECTION

263100- 4 PHOTOVOl TAlC SYSTEM


SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

1.3

1.4


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

A.

1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

DEFINITIONS

BF: Ballast factor.

CRT: Color-rendering index.

CU: Coefficient of utilization.

HID: High-intensity discharge.

LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

RCR: Room cavity ratio.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 1


6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods offield assembly, components, features, and accessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HV AC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.

1. 7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: One years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: One years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.



B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

l. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: One year from date of Substantial

Completion.

C. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard fonTI, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2

A. In other Pati 2 at'ticles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. .

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMALE5A.

Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMALE5B.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

Interior Lighting 2651 00 - 3


F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent vlrgm acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62,41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 Insert value kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and

shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

C. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.



2.4

2.5

A.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Celiified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated.

BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.l1, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

A.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Celiified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated.

EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1400 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Comlection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.



6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapSUlated models designed to

minimize audible fixture noise.

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic DistOltion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 6. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 7. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 8. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-Ievel ballasts.

C. Auxiliary Instant-On Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.

D. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniterstalter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150W.

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C).



3. Open-circuit operation shall not reduce average lamp life.

2.7 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, Nickel cadmium type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically discOlmects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage.



2.9

A.

B.

C.

D.

8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

FLUORESCENT LAMPS

Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.

T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per stmi, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).

2.1 0 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of24,000 hours, minimum.

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.

B. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Pulse-Stmi, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

D. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.



2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channeland angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: II2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 112-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class,), soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580lA 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gauge.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a SUppOlt element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent SUppOlt rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor on.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

Interior Lighting 265100 - 9


E.

3.2

A.

B.



Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

. ..... END .....



SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1- GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

1.3

1.4


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Lumimiire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories.


A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

A.

1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

DEFINITIONS

CRI: Color-rendering index.

HID: High-intensity discharge or LED as approved.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and SUppOlt component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials.

Exterior Lighting 2656 00 - 1


S. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 2. Design calculations, celtified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

I.S QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. SUppOlt poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more than 114 inch (6 mm) deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below ground line.

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 2


D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

E. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from

date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

A.

B.

MANUFACTURERS

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:



3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled foJ' installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Pmis: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resili'ent gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dili, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5INACE No.1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior SUifaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

Exterior Lighting 2656 00 - 4


a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors unless otherwise indicated.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored 01' electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm 01' thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: as indicated.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 Ix) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 Ix) with 15-second minimum time delay.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA Cl~6.1O. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher.

-B. Ballast Characteristics:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better.

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher.



D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMALL 1.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open -circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F . 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.

C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 degC.

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150W.

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.

2.6 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of24,000 hours, minimum.

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.

B. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Pulse-Stmi, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CR165, and color temperature 4000 K.

D. Ceramic, Pulse-Stmi, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

Exterior Lighti ng 265600 - 6


2.7 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO L TS-4.

2.8 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); I-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, straight or Square, straight as indicated on construction documents. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

B. Steel Mast Arms: as indicated on construction documents. Material an4 finish same as pole.

C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.

2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

3. Match pole material and finish.

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15 -inch veltical spacing, alternating on opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.

F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weatheltight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.

G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded I12-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching



grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of pole.

J. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

K. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5INACE No.1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior SUlfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6 with access handhole in pole wall.

B. Poles: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, straight or Square, straight as indicated on the construction documents. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 112-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

E. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.


ALBUQUERQUE HEALTH CARE FOR THE HOMElESS FIRST STREET CAMPUS EXPANSION .

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.10 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 Y, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division26 Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.

1. Recessed, 12 inches above finished grade. 2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass cover, Insert color to match

pole, that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. 3. With cord opening. 4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.

B. Minimum 1800-W transformer, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.

C. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting boIts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

D. Transformer Type Base: Same material and color as pole. Coordinate dimensions to suit pole's base flange and accept ballast(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.



3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a shOli piece of 112-inchdiameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange

to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



3.5

A.

B.

3.6

A.

1. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 2. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

DEMON S TRA TlON

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lumina ire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

...... END .....



SECTION 31 0000

SITE EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01

A.

1.02

A.

B.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY

This Section includes the following: 1. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for

buried utility structures. 2. Preparing subgrade for asphalt pavement, gravel pavement, walks, and stairs.

Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting

trees to remain. 3. Division 21 ,22,23 and 26 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical

utilities and buried utility structures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, inciuding haunches to suppOli sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Layer placed between the base course and asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.

1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineering Representative.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineering Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

SITE EARTHWORK 31 0000 "1


O.

R.

1.

J.

K.

1.04

A.

1.05

A.

Engineered Fill: Soil materials meeting specific specifications used to raise existing grades.

Fill: Soil matelials used to raise existing grades in areas that are not paved or support site structures.

Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 Cli. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of I 00 blows/2 inches.

Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below drainage fill, topsoil materials, or paving materials.

Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

SUBMITTALS

Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. Provide copies to engineer/architect for approval.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill, engineered fill, and backfill. Provide copies to engineer/architect for approval.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. NotifY Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01

A.

B.

31 0000 -2

SOIL MATERIALS

Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups OW, OP, OM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, fi'ozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTMD 2487 soil classification groups OC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CR, OL, OR, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

SITE EARTHWORK


C. Backfill and Fill: Use only satisfactory soil materials.

D. Engineered Fill: Soil from on-site or off-site borrow sources having a plasticity index of 12 or less, classified as satisfactory per definition above, and meeting the following grading requirements:

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

4" 100 1" 90-100

No.4 No. 200

70-100 7-48

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifYing underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

I. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01

A.

PREPARATION

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

c.

D.

E.

3.02

A.

B.

Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

Under exterior walks, stairs, slabe, overexcavate a minimum of 12-inches. Moisture condition and place sub grade into excavation in 6-inch maximum loose thickness lifts and compact to 95% minimum density.

Under asphalt and gravel pavement over excavate a minimum of 12-inches. Moisture condition and place sub grade into excavation in 6-inch maximum loose thickness lifts and compact to 95% minimum density.

DEWATERING

Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and sUlTounding area.

Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

SITE EARTHWORK 31 0000 ·3


3.03

A.

3.04

A.

3.05

A.

B.

C.

3.06

A.

3.07

A.

EXPLOSIVES

Explosives: Do not use explosives.

EXCAVATION, GENERAL

Excavation to subgrade elevations.

1. Excavated materials for fill and backfill will use only approved soil materials.

APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE and BASE COURSE

NotifY Architect and the Owner's Geotechnical Engineering Representative when excavations have reached required sub grade or base course.

Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identifY soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.

Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineering Representative.

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away £i'om edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

BACKFILL

Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent 01' temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.08 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Refer to Section 3.11.A for 4" minimum to 8" maximum depth requirements. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

31 00004 SITE EARTHWORK


C. Place and compact initial backfill of subgrade material, free of particles larger than I inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

D.

E.

F.

G.

3.09

A.

B.

1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the fulliengih of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.

Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.

Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.

Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

SITE FILL

Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

Plow, scarifY, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as per civil/arch. Plans.

3.10

A.

3.11

A.

B.

C.

3.12

MOISTURE CONTROL

Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen,' or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarifY and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS

Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by handoperated tampers.

Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full lenglh of each structure.

Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTMD 1557: 1. Under all bearing footings and slabs on grade, asphalt pavement, gravel pavement, walks, and

stairs, prepare subgrade per Section 3.1, compact every 8 inch layer of existing sub grade and engineered fill at 95 percent.


SITE EARTHWORK 31 0000-5


A. The Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. The Contractor shall provide coordination and oversight of all Owner furnished testing, and shall provide adequate notification of tests to the Owner prior to scheduling.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

D.

E.

3.13

A.

B.

1. At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 500 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 50 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

Provide all test results and an as-built survey of subgrade elevations to engineer/architect for approval.

PROTECTION

Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineering Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1.

31 0000 -6

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

SITE EARTHWORK


3.14

A.

B.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

Disposal: Remove surplus waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

Disposal: Spread surplus satisfactory soil in the areas designated by the owner. Berms shall not have slopes greater the 3' Horizontal to I' Vertical and shall not be higher than 4 feet above existing grade. Any remaining soil shall be considered waste material and disposed perParagraph A above.

END OF SECTION

SITE EARTHWORK 31 0000 -7


31 oooo.s SITE EARTHWORK


SECTION 31 1000

SITE ClEARING

PARTl GENERAL

1.01

A.

1.02

A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY

This Section includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Removing above-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Coordinate sprinkler line and head locations with the School District Maintenance Staff.


I. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" for verifYing utility locations and for recording field measurements.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations.

3. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations.

4. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 5. Division 31 and 32 for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and

planting.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.

SITE ClEARING 31 1000 - 1


1.04 MA TERlALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."

1. IdentifY and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Propeliy: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on propeliy adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

C. NotifY utility locator service for City of Albuquerque at 260-1990 before site clearing. This service will require a minimum of 48-hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01

A.

SOIL MATERIALS

Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Earthwork-."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are

31 1000 - 2 SITE ClEARING


not available on-site.

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

3.02

A.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

UTILITIES

Owner will an'ange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities to be removed.

E. Several landscape irrigation lines and heads exist within the construction are. The school district maintenance staff will relocate these facilities before construction begins. Contractor shall coordinate with the maintenance staff before constlUction begins.

3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where·

such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below

exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3


3.04

A.

B.

C.

3.05

A.

B.

3.06

A.

31 1000 - 4

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

TOPSOIL STRIPPING

Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

SITE IMPROVEMENTS

Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

DISPOSAL

Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

SITE CLEARING


SECTION 31 2316

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01

A.

1.02

A.

B.

1.03

A.

1.04

A.

B.

C.

RELATED DOCUMENTS


SUMMARY

This Section includes excavation support and protection systems.

Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 2. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for excavating and backfilling.


Design, provide, monitor, and maintain an anchored and braced excavation support and protection system capable of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and supporting sidewalls of excavations.

1. Work includes removing excavation support and protection systems when no longer needed. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, pavements,

and other improvements adjacent to excavation.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

Project Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is part of the Contract Documents. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of the subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. The Owner, Architect, and Engineer will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor.

Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 31 2316-1


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations.

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

l. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces.

D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection systems remain stable.

E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems.

3.02 REMOV AL AND REP AIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

31 2316-2

l. Remove all excavation support and protection systems. 2. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing

excavation support and protection systems.

END OF SECTION

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION


SECTION 32 1216

HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01

A.

1.02

A.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes the following:

1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Aggregate base course material. 4. Pavement-marking paint.


1.03

A.

1.04

A.

1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate sub grade and base courses and aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the New Mexico Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction - 1987, published by the New Mexico Chapter American Public Works Association (Revised 12/06).

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol.

D. Material Test RepOlis: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with requirements indicated.

E. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifYing that each material complies with requirements.

HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 321216-1


l.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with the New Mexico State Highway and Transportation Department

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on Architect's evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.

C. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook

l.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

l.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F . 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTMD 3910. 3. Aggragate Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement. . 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of60 deg F at time of placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Aggregate Gradation: The aggregate materials proposed for use in the required design mix shall meet all requirements of Class B as specified in Section 116 of the City of Albuquerque Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

2.02 ASPHAL T MATERIALS

321216 - 2 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING


A.

B.

c.

2.03

A.

Asphalt Cement: Shall meet all requirements of City of Albuquerque Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Additionally the submitted design mix shall show the following properties: Marshall Stability - 1800 lb. Minimum.

Aggregate Base Course: Shall meet all requirements of City of Albuquerque Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Class lor Class 2 as specified in Section 302.

Tack Coat: Shall meet all requirements of New Mexico State Highway and Transportation Department Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 407

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I, or AASHTO M-248, Type N.

1. Color: White.

C. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 84 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for anchoring to substrate.

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch, minimum length 10 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01

A.

B.

C.

3.02

A.

EXAMINATION

Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imp~sed loads.

Proof-roll subgrade using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.

PATCHING AND REPAIRS

Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces veliically.

1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving. 2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush

with adjacent surface. 3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while still hot.

Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.



B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gaI./sq. yd. of surface.

3.03

A.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

SURFACE PREPARATION

General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from sub grade or base course. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub grade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

3.04

A.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of250 deg F 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way

slopes, unless otherwise indicated. . 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in

asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 8 feet wide, except where infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

C.

3.05

A.

321216-4

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt surface course.

Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

JOINTS

Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. 2.

Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of6 inches.

HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING


3.06

A.

3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of24 inches. 4. ConstlUct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as described in AI's

"The Asphalt Handbook." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

COMPACTION

General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F .

B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 1559, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Aggregate Base Course: Base Course shall be installed over compacted and graded sub grade. When placed, base course material shall be within 2% plus or minus of optimum moisture content as determined by the contractor retained geotechnical testing agency. When compacted, the base course shall be compacted to a density of minimum density 95%.in accordance with ASTM D-I557

F. Subgrade: After grading to the lines and grades shown on the project plans, the top 6" of subgrade shall be removed, brought to within 3% of the optimum moisture contect, and compacted to minimum density 95%.in accordance with ASTM D-I557

G. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method.

H. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

1. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

J. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.07 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:



l. Base Course: Plus or minus 112 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 114 inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

3.08

A.

B.

c.

D.

3.09

A.

3.10

A.

1. Base Course: 114 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum

allowable variance from template is 114 inch.

PAVEMENT MARKING

Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking.

Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 Jb/gal. .

WHEEL STOPS

Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized .steel dowels embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement.

1. Extend upper pOliion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement.


Testing Agency: Contractor wiII engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.

l. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each repOli whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTMD 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

321216 - 6 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING


E. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mi>.1ure delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 1559, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results fi'om 4 samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 500 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and conelated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION



321216-8 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING


SECTION 32 1313

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:

1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Walkways.


1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 7 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement and at

isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction. 3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: POliland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313-1


3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-fi'amed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves ofa radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTMA 615/A615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Bar SuppOlis: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar suppOlis according to

321313 - 2 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT


CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoA),-coated or other dielectric-polymer coated wire bar supports.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IP portland pozzolan cement.

D. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as follows: 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

E. Water: ASTM C 94.

2.04 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures ..

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2.05 CURRING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz.lsq. yd dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.



2.06 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type; ready mixed; complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I, or AASHTO M 248, Type N.

C. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete; 2500-psi minimum compressive strength; approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 84 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for dowel-anchoring to substrate.

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter of3/4 inch, minimum length 10 inches.

2.07 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Slump Limit: 3 inches.

D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than pOltland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.

E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of2.5 to 4.5 percent.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent:

1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for II2-inch maximum aggregate.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116.

1.

321313-4

When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-112 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.



PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verifY need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and sub grade is ready to receive pavement.

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSl's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.04 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.

1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-112 inches into concrete.

2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 321313 - 5


4. Use a bonding agent. at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

5. Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet, or every 400 square feet maximum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant

is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip

joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary

preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas of no more than 6-feet square or 6-feet in length. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a. Radius: 3/8 inch.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concretewhen.cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

1. Radius: 3/8 inch.

3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. NotifY other trades to permit installation oftheir work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

321313 - 6 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT


D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.

I. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect.

I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.

K. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations.

L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306. I and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical

accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.



N. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture unifonn without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to unifonn granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces ifhot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared fi'om concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

321313-8

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

2.

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces

and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,



and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.08 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as foHows:

4. Elevation: 1/8 inch. 5. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 114 inch. 6. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 118 inch. 7. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 8. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 114 inch. 9. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 10. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of

dowel 114 inch per 12 inches. 11. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 12. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 114 inch, no minus. l3. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.09 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

I. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 Ib/gal.

3.10 WHEEL STOPS

A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes cast into wheel stops. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Extend upper portion of dowelS inches into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.

B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.

7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

8. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 Cll. yd., Architect may waive compressive- strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified cOl11:pressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 - and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests ·of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

321313-10 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT


A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B. Prill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with pOliland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION

CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 1313 - 11


321313-12 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT


SECTION 32 1373

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.

B. Related Sections include thefollowing:

1. Division 32 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.

2. Division 32 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 'ii-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 321373·1


1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" A1iicle from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products within a 36-month period preceding the [Notice to Proceed with] [commencement of] the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1.05DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.06PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant maimfacturer for applications

indicated. 5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part2 articles.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

32 1373 - 2 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS


2.02MATERIALS, GENERAL

A.

B.

C.

2.03

A.

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

Delete paragraph below if sealants specified are not offered in a choice of colors, which is the case with most pavement joint sealants.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS.

1. Products:

a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.

2.04 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTMD 3406.

2.05

A.

B.

c.

D.

2.06

1. [Available ]Products:

a. Crafco Inc.; Superseal 4441777. b. Meadows,. W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3406. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>

JOINT- SEALANT BACKER MA TERIALS

General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTMD 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom- side adhesion of sealant.

PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 321373·3


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. .

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

321373 - 4

1. 2.

Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS


F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

END OF SECTION

PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 321373-5


321373·6 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS


SECTION 32 3000

SITE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01

A.

B.

1.02

A.

1.03

A.

B.

c.

D.

E.

1.04

A.

SECTION INCLUDES

Site Recreational Equipment provided and installed by the General Contractor.

This Section does not include: Playground Equipment provided and installed by the APS Playground Contractor.

RELATED SECTIONS

Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete:

SUBMITTALS

Section 01 3300

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each major product required. Include data substantiating that products to be furnished comply with requirements of the contract documents.

Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings for fabrication and erection, including plans, elevations, and large scale details of typical sections and connections.

Provide layout, dimensions, and identification of each unit corresponding to sequence of installation and erection procedures.

Selection Samples: For initial selection of colors and textures, submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual product pieces, showing full range of colors and textures available.

Verification Samples: To verify compliance with requirements of contract documents, submit complete sets of samples, illustrating full range of color

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain required products from a single manufacturer.

Accessories: Provide accessory items only as produced or recommended by manufacturer of primary products.

B. Surface Burning Hazard: Where products are required to comply with limits for surface burning characteristics, provide materials which have been tested, rated, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the following ratings, as listed in UL's "Building Materials Directory":

1. Maximum flame spread: 25 2. Maximum smoke developed: 450

1.05 WARRANTY

SITE EQUIPMENT 323000·1


Provide to the Owner, an executed copy of the manufacturer's warranty against manufacturing defect for a period of three (3) years.

The Contractor warrants that his work will remain free from defects of labor and materials used in conjunction with his work in accordance with the General Conditions for this project or a minimum of three (3) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01

A. B.

MANUFACTURER'S

Provide products by Manufacturers of specified products listed below. Substitution will be considered under provisions of section 01 6300

1. Products of other manufacturers must be prior approved.

2. Submit supporting technical data, engineering calculations, certification of equivalent experience and samples for comparison.

2.02 SITE EQUIPMENT

A. Interior and Exterior Benches: l. The design is based on the following product: Wabash Valley available through

The Playwell Group (505) 899-1762,

or approved equal. a. Provide Estate Series with Back

l.) one (1) 5'-0" long (interior) 2.) two (2) 6'-0" long (exterior) 3.) one (1) 8' -0" long (exterior)

b. Rib Pattern. c. Cast Aluminum frame with back d. Surface Mountable e. Powdercoated finish. Color as selected by Architect from

Manufacturer's standard colors. B. Restroom Bench:

C.

303000 - 2

1. The design is based on the following product: Wabash Valley available through

Tables: l.

The Playwell Group (505) 899-1762,

or approved equal. a. Provide Butler Collection Series without back

1.) one (1) 4' -0" long b. Horizontal Slat Pattern. c. Cast Aluminum frame without back d. Surface Mountable e. Powdercoated finish. Color as selected by Architect from

Manufacturer's standard colors.

The design is based on the following product: Wabash Valley available through The Playwell Group (505) 899-1762,

SITE EQUIPMENT


or approved equal. a. Provide and install

1.) Two (2) Exterior In-ground mounted basic frame, 46" Octagonal Signature Series table with 4 seats and game table insert.

b. Perforated Pattern c. Powdercoated finish. Color as selected by Architect from

Manufacturer's standard colors

D. Interior Silk Trees and Containers: 1. The design is based on the following product: Silkflowers.com

(800) 783 -9966, or approved equal.

a. Provide and install two (2) 6 foot high Deluxe Silk Ficus Trees in two (2) 22" Uptown Burnt Copper containers with large grass container planting.

b. Provide and install two (2) 5.5 foot high Silk Butterfly Palm Trees in two (2) 22" Uptown Burnt Copper containers with large grass container planting.

c. Provide and install two (2) 3.5 foot high dwarf Japanese Maple - Red Trees in two (2) 13" Bronze Fiberglass Fishbowl containers with green moss container planting.

2. Locate in the Lobby per the Owner's direction

E. Bike Parking Racks: 1. The design is based on the following product: DERO, a Playcore Company,

www.dero.com. or approved equal.

a. Provide and install two (2) "Arc Rack" bike parking racks. 1.) In-ground mount 2.) Powdercoated finish

F. Exterior Planters (Roof Deck):

SITE EQUIPMENT

The design is based on the following product: Bison Cubes Bison Innovative Products, 1975 West 13th Ave, Denver, CO 80204, T)303-892-0400, 303-825-5988 [email protected] ,

or approved equal.

1. Bison Cubes specified for use on pedestals are to be used with pedestrian decks only. 2. Provide and install planter liners. 3. Provide and install drainage trays for Cubes that are placed on top of the decking. 4. Provide and install the following Cubes:

A. Bison Aluminum Powder Coated Cube CUBE-PC242436 a. Provide and install one (1) cube b. LengthlWidthlHeight: 23.875 inches x 23.875 inches x 36 inches

(606mm x 606mm x 914mm). c. Weight: 391bs (18kg). d. Construction: 0.90 Marine Grade Aluminum (3/32 inches thick). e. Recycled content: 470/0-66% recycled raw material content. f. Drainage: Standard Drainage holes and Irrigation Sleeve included. g. Drainage Fittings: by special order. Contact Bison for more

information. h. Mounting:

323000·3


1) Free standing. 2) On Bison Pedestals: Place corner of cube onto a Bison Pedestal as

directed in installation instructions. In addition, place one or more pedestals in the center or along the sides of pedestals to support anticipated weights.

\. Metal Finish and Colors: Powder coated. 1) Low VOC Finishes, meets EPA reference Test Method 24, ASTM

D2369 for determination for volatile content. 2) As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's 7 standard

colors.

B.Bison Aluminum Powder Coated Cube CUBE-PC482420 a. Provide and install one (1) cube b. Length/Width/Height: 47.875 inches x 23.875 inches x 20 inches

(l216mm x 606mm x 508mm). c. Weight: 39lbs (l8kg). d. Construction: 0.90 Marine Grade Aluminum (3/32 inches thick). e. Recycled content: 470/0-66% recycled raw material content. f. Drainage: Standard Drainage holes and Irrigation Fittings included. g. Drainage Fittings: by special order. Contact Bison for more

information. h. Mounting:

1) Free standing. 2) On Bison Pedestals: Place corner of cube onto a Bison Pedestal as

directed in installation instructions. In addition, place one or more pedestals in the center or along the sides of pedestals to support anticipated weights.

i. Metal Finish and Colors: Powder coated. 1) Low VOC Finishes, meets EPA reference Test Method 24, ASTM

D2369 for determination for volatile content. 2) As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's 7 standard colors.

5. Bison Cubes specified for use on pedestals are to be used with pedestrian decks only. 6. Provide and install planter liners. 7. Provide and install drainage trays for Cubes that are placed on top of the decking.

ROOFTOP APPLICA nONS USING BISON DECK SUPPORTS 1. Bison Cubes specified for use on pedestals must be restrained by perimeter blocking or

walls on all sides. Lateral movement greater than 1/8" max is unacceptable and will be rejected.

2. The total weights of dead and live loads must be calculated and dispersed evenly over the number of pedestals needed to carry the expected weight. To avoid point loading, the use of planters or architectural features with 'feet' is not allowed. Failure to adequately support the additional weight of any such features or items may cause significant damage to the deck, underlying structure, or waterproofing system.

3. When installing Bison Cubes, additional support may be needed under the center and corners of the cubes depending on the size and anticipated weight loads. A minimum of one additional pedestal support must be installed in the middle of each cube and for every 500 lbs. (or portion thereof) of static loading. Any feature that creates vibration must be provided for in special consultation and written agreement with Bison.

4. Container Fill: a. Do not use soil weighing in excess of25-501bs / cubic foot. b. The bottom of extra-large and tall planters can be filled with lightweight filler.

5. The substrate immediately below the Cubes and Pedestals shall provide positive drainage.

30 3000 - 4 SITE EQUIPMENT


6. In the case of decks over roofing substrates, roof systems must meet local building code and be in accordance with the NRCA recommended good construction practices. Only roofing manufacturer approved systems shall be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

3.02

A.

B.

C.

Inspect substrates and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed, and verifY that installation properly may commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved fully.

INSTALLATION

General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance ofthe work.

Install all equipment plumb, level and in true alignment.

Planter Installation 1. Place landscape fabric on the bottom of the containers to prevent soil from falling

through drainage holes. 2. Container Fill:

a.Install Potting soil. Do not use soil weighing in excess of25-501bs / cubic foot

b. The bottom of tall planters can be filled with lightweight filler 3. On Pedestals: Refer to Bison Innovative Products Pedestal Specifications for complete

installation instructions Pedestals should support each corner ofthe Cube and along the sides and in

the center underneath the cube at 2 ft intervals on larger cubes. If needed, install additional pedestals under Cubes to support anticipated

dead and live loads. Contact Bison for information regarding center support of Aluminum Cubes. Install in accordance with Bison Innovative Products and other contributing

manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.03 ADJUSTING

Final adjustments: Upon achieving substantial completion of the work, adjust all operable components to ensure that they are properly installed and functioning smoothly. Replace any component which cannot be adjusted for proper operation.

3.04 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean all surfaces which have become soled or coated as a result of work of this section, using proper methods which will not scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.

For cleaning, use only products and techniques acceptable to manufacturer of products being cleaned.

3.05 PROTECTION

SITE EQUIPMENT 323000·5


General: Institute protective procedures and install protective materials as required to ensure that work or this section will be without damage or deterioration at substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

303000 - 6 SITE EQUIPMENT


SECTION 328400

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

The terms "Contractor" and "Provider" are used interchangeably throughout this specification.

The work consists of installing a complete underground sprinkler system for plants shown on the Drawings and as specified hereafter. This is a complete Design / Build System provided and installed by the Contractor / Provider. Contractor will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning of the complete and functioning system.

The Contractor performing this work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and permits necessary for design and completion of the system. The construction of the sprinkler system shall include the furnishing, installing and testing of all pipe, fittings, valves, heads, controllers, wires, air release and vacuum valves, backflow preventers, inlet and discharge piping, automatic drain valves, manual drain valves, valve boxes, water meters, and all other components pertinent to the plans and specifications of this system. The Contractor shall perform all trenching, excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical work, welding, and any other work necessary for the completion of the project.


A Provider will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning of the complete and functioning system.

B Provider will be responsible for all corresponding costs.

C Provider will be responsible for all required engineering drawings and other documentation required for all permits for construction of the system; Provider will be responsible for obtaining all corresponding permits, except for the site permit that encompasses the overall facility project.

D Provider will be responsible for all engineering drawings, documentation, and procedures required by the utility to complete the interconnection, commissioning and start-up ofthe system. Provider will be responsible for all interconnection related costs.

E Provider will work directly with project architect, general contractor and subcontractors to plan and coordinate installation of the system with the overall project.

F Providers project team must be celiified and/or licensed to by appropriate local jurisdiction to design and construct the system. At minimum, this includes NM licensed PE's (professional engineers) and valid contractor license.

G Provider shall coordinate all inspections required for the system installation.

H Provider shall furnish all materials, tools, labor and equipment required for the system

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 328400 - 1


completion at Provider's expense.

J Provider shall supply the equivalent of an owners/operators manual, including maintenance instructions.

K All work must meet all current applicable national and local codes.

L All work must meet OSHA requirements.

M The system design, engineering and installation shall in compliance with all applicable code requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Prepare and make five sets of submittals providing manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings indicating irrigation design (irrigation design shall correspond with planting design), and "cut sheets" on all controllers, heads, backflow preventers, valves, pumps and other equipment as required.

1.04 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "record" drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes in the location of sprinkler heads, controllers, backflow preventers, valves, drains, meters, points of connection, pull boxes and wire splice boxes, pipe and wire routing and other changes that may have been made from the original drawings and specifications as provided to him. All gate valves, manual drains, wire splice and automatic and manual valve locations shall be shown with actual measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the filed. Valve locations shall be shown with actual measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the field.

B. At the time of final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish a set of reproducible "record" drawings prepared by a qualified draftsperson showing the entire completed system as actually installed. This is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be construed to be the responsibility of any other party. This drawing shall be accurate and to scale. The symbols for valves, heads, and piping, etc. shall be described by a Legend. The legend shall also be modified to designate any "record" changes. The final drawings shall be dated and clearly labeled "RECORD DRAWING".

C. The Contractor shall also provide and install in the controller enclosure at the Site, a legible reduction of the Record Drawing, laminated in plastic.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A.

B.

328400 - 2

All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type and shall be the best of their class and kind. All materials shall have a minimum guarantee of one year against material defects or defective workmanship.

The following products are a basic design guide of components necessary for a complete and functioning system. Contractor / Provider shall be responsible for designing, providing, and installing products appropriate to the function of a complete system.

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


2.02 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Plastic Pipe: All mainline pipe, from the point of connection to the zone valve, with a diameter of two inches (2") or less shall be Schedule 40 PVC and shall conform to ASTM D 1785; mainline pipe with a diameter of two and one-half inches (2Yz") or greater shaH be Class 200 "0" ring gasket pipe, SDR 21; lateral line piping downstream of the zone valves which is 114" in diameter and greater shall be Class 200 SDR 21 and shall conform to ASTM D 2241. Solvent shaH meet ASTM L 2774 and D 2855 requirements. All PVC pipe shall be continuously marked with identification of the manufacturer, type, class, and size, and shall be free of holes, foreign material, blisters, wrinkles, dents or sunburn.

B. Location Tape: Irrigation line location tape shaH be THOR Enterprises in'igation line marking tape.

C. PVC Fittings: Fittings on PVC lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC, Type 1, CeH Classification 13454-B, and shall comply with ASTM D 2466.

D. Threaded Nipples: AIl threaded PVC nipples shall be Schedule 80 Molded PVC pipe. All galvanized nipples shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

2.03 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES

A. Valves:

Valves for use in electricaHy controlled automatic control systems shall be diaphragm actuated and hydraulically operated solenoid valves.

B. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be appropriate to the design.

2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS AND BUBBLERS

Sprinkler heads and bubblers shall be provided and installed as required for the sustenance of each plant

2.05 CONTROLLERS

Controllers shaH be provided and instaHed as required for function of the system as in locations as directed by the Owner.

2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. The backflow prevented shaH meet the requirements of all major plumbing codes.

B. The backflow prevented shaH be installed in the circuit piping in accordance with the requirements of aH applicable state and local codes.

2.07 CEMENTS, CLEANERS/PRIMERS AND JOINT COMPOUNDS

A. Cement shaH be #2200 series Uni-Weld or Rectorseal Cold low temperature plastic pipe cement for use on all sizes and schedules of PVC pipe and fittings. Cement must be NSSF approved and meet ASTM D 2564 requirements.

B. Cleaner/primer shaH be #8700 United Elchemhi-etch cleaner/primer.



C. All threaded connections between metal to metal, PVC to metal and PVC to PVC shall be made using RECTORSEAL #5 slow dry, soft set, thread sealing compound. Thread sealing compound shall not be used on threaded connections between sprinkler and nipple or bubbler and nipple.

D. All "0" ring gasket and pipe spigot ends shall be lubricated using the lubricant recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer. If the pipe manufacturer does not provide a lubricant for the pipe, use IPS Weld-on #787 gasket lube as manufactured by Industrial Polychemical Service.

2.08 WIRE

A. Wire for the 120 volt wiring shall be solid copper (or stranded copper in larger wire sizes), underground feeder for direct burial and PVC insulated. Size of wire shall be #12 A WG.

B. Wire for the 24 volt wiring shall be solid copper wire, PVC insulated, UL approved underground feeder wire for direct burial in ground. Common wires shall be #12, white. The wire shall be supplied in either 500' or 2,500' rolls. The control wires shall be #14 of any color other than white.

C. Wire Splicing Materials: All wire splices shall be made water-tight using 3M Scotchlok Connectors.

2.09 OTHER MlSCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND MATERIALS

All other miscellaneous fittings and materials shall be included in the Design.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

This section includes installation specifications for all items installed as a part of the sprinkler irrigation system. Certain construction procedures or minor equipment. installation procedures may have been omitted from these specifications that are necessary for the proper installation of the system. In any case, all materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to manufacturer's recommendations and specifications, local and state codes, and as specified herein.

3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING

The Contractor shall be responsible for correct procedures in loading, unloading, staking, transporting and handling all materials to be used in the system. The Contractor shall avoid rough handling which could affect the useful life of equipment. Pipe shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations on loading, unloading and storage.

3.03 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

A.

B.

328400 - 4

The Contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe and all sprinkler heads and valves prior to trenching.

Excavation and trenching for pipe lines shall be true and line with the trench banks and as nearly vertical as practical. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than necessary to permit proper joining, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other installation procedures that may be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal and vertical separation of 4" between pipes in the same trench.

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


C. In areas where trees are present, trench lines will be adjusted on the site to eliminate any damage to tree roots.

D. Trench depths shall be sufficient to provide the specified pipe cover as described elsewhere in these specifications. In rocky areas the trenching depth shall be 6" below normal trench depth to allow for pipe bedding as described in other portions of these specifications.

E. Depth of Bury: Minimum cover over mainline and lateral piping shall be as required by Code and appropriate to the Design

3.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION

A. Installation of plastic pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and procedures and as mentioned in the specifications. Manufacturer's recommended procedures for making solvent weld fittings shall be strictly adhered to. Only solvent cements, cleaners, and primers or lubricants recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer shall be used.

B. Caution shall be exercised by the Contractor in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be stored and transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lie flat without subjecting it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged or in any other way found to be defective, either before or after laying shall be replaced with sound pipe without additional expense to the Owner.

C. Before installation, the inside of the pipe shall be cleaned of all dirt and foreign matter and shall be kept in a clean condition during and after laying of pipe. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be secured closed so that no trench water, earth or other foreign substances will enter the pipe or fittings. Where pipe ends are left for future expansion or connections, they shall be valved and capped.

D. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be assembled to permit the pipe or frtt.ings to be jointed at the true parallel position of the fittings. Placement of pipe in curving trenches which cause excessive bending and stress on pipe and fittings will not be permitted. No excess piping or fittings shall be permitted in the installation of the system, which may increase pressure loss or potential blockage.

E. Before installing the pipe, all rubbish and large rocks shall be removed fi-om the trenches. Ifthe soil is extremely rocky, the trenches shall be bedded with dirt or 'sand as outlined in other pOliions of these specifications. The full length of each section of the pipe shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells,joints and couplings.

F. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. Any water which may be encountered or may accumulate in the trenches or excavation shall be pumped out or otherwise removed as necessary to keep the bottom of the trench or excavation free and clear of water during the progress of the work. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is 32° F or below.

G. PVC pipe will expand or contract at the rate of 1" per 100' per 10° F change of temperature. Therefore, the pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer.

H. The minimum horizontal and vertical clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 4".



1. After all sprinkler piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these specifications, the control valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed.

3.05 SOLVENT WELDING PROCEDURE

A. PVC plastic pipe shall be squarely cut utilizing a hacksaw with a blade of 18 or 24 teeth per inch.

B. Burrs left from cutting shall be wiped off with a clean dry cloth.

C. Utilizing a cleaner/primer, thoroughly clean the mating pipe end and the fitting socket with a clean, dry cloth.

D. Apply a uniform coat of solvent cement to the outside of the pipe end with a non-synthetic brush or dauber.

E. In like manner, apply a thin coating of solvent cement to the inside of the fitting socket.

F. Re-apply a light coat of solvent cement to the pipe end and quickly inseli it into the fitting to the full depth of the fitting socket.

G. Rotate the pipe or fitting approximately 1/4 turn to insure even distribution ofthe solvent cement.

H. Hold in position for approximately 30 seconds.

1. Wipe off any excess solvent cement that forms as a bead around the outer shoulder.

1. Care should be taken so as not to use an excess amount of solvent cement that could cause burrs or obstructions to form on the inside of the pipe joint.

K. Solvent weld joints shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.

3.06 BACKFILLING

A.

B.

C.

328400 - 6

Upon completion of a particular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, partial backfiIIing can begin, leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection during the hydrostatic testing. Only upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test can the backfill operation be completed for anyone particular section.

Backfill material shall be free from rock, large stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage pipe during the backfilling operations.

In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be unsuitable for use in backfill by the Architect, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of by the Contractor and at his own expense. The Contractor shall then, at no additional cost to the Owner, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials free of large clods of earth or sharp stones and capable of attaining the same relative density of the surrounding ground.

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


D. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6" below the nonnal trench depth to allow for 6" of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, there shall be at least 6" of padding on all sides of the pipe as a padding against the rock wall of the trench.

E. All mainline and lateral piping shall have irrigation line location tape installed in the trench six (6") inches above the pipe.

F. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" in depth and shall be thoroughly tamped, or water compacted to near original density or so that no settling will result. Backfill shall be placed to the original ground level. If settlement of trenches occurs within one (1) year from date of completion, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to refill trenches and re-seed or sod the repaired areas.

3.07 SADDLE TAPS

No saddle taps shall be pennitted.

3.08 THRUST BLOCKS

Concrete thrust block shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure. Thrust blocks shall be constructed at all direction changes, size changes, valves and terminations or at any other points of the system that will result in an unbalanced thrust line for equipment 2 W' and larger. Do not obstruct the outlets of fittings which are intended for future connections. Thrust blocks shall be poured against undisturbed emih.

3.09 SLEEVED CROSSING

Unless otherwise noted on plans, all piping installed under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two (2) sizes larger than the pipe to be sleeved. Wiring shall be placed in a separate sleeve from that of the pipe crossing and shall be 1 1/4" Class 200 PVC. Ends at sleeves shall be sealed with duct tape following installation of wire or piping.

3.10 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION

A. Sprinkler heads shall be installed with an 8" space between the edge of the sprinkler head and curbs, walls, driveways, building walls, etc. Heads shall be installed in the vertical position and backfilled and compacted to near original density.

B. Contractor shall verifY turf area dimension while staking sprinkler head location. Sprinkler heads shall be spaced to achieve uniform coverage.

C. After all piping and risers are in place and connected and before installation of the sprinkler heads, all control valves for a given section shall be fully opened and a full head of water shall be used to flush out the system. If water pressure without the heads installed is not sufficient to provide adequate water flow from end risers, the Contractor shall cap off enough heads closest to the water source to provide adequate flushing of the end riser assemblies.

3.11 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. The Controller location is indicated by the Owner. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the requirements of making the power connections at the locations noted (120 volt supply to the Controller) and shall include in his lump sum price for the sprinkler irrigation system, the cost to complete this portion of the contract.



B. The Controller shall be mounted and wired according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures and as specified herein and per manfacturer's recommendations.

C. For Controllers installed inside of buildings, vaults or other enclosures, the Contractor shall provide and install on the Controller an electrical pigtail outlet and a Tass and Seymour pilot switch and receptacle 15ACI-RPL.

D. When Controllers are mounted outside of any building, vault or enclosure, the Contractor shall direct wire the 120 volt power supply to the Controller.

E. Remote control valves shall be connected to Controller in the numerical sequences appropriate to the design.

3.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION

A. All automatic control valves shall be of the type and size and installation shall be according to these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. The valve boxes shall be of the size and type appropriate to the design.

C. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed using 3M Scotchlok Connectors and the Contractor shall provide a 36" wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires.

3.13 24 VOLT CONTROL VALVE WIRING

A. All wire installation procedures as described herein shall be checked to conform to local codes.

B. The Contractor shall install the 24 volt control valve wiring in the same trench as the irrigation mainline. Only when it is not possible for the wires to be installed in the mainline trench, they shall be installed in the lateral pipe trench. All wires shall be laid below the pipe. In no case shall the wire be laid on top of the pipe. The wires shall be laid loose in the trench and taped together at 10'-0" intervals. When trenches used for piping are not appr~priate for routing wire, Contractor shall install wire in a separate trench, 18" deep.

C. Wire splices, other than at valve box locations, shall be kept to a minimum and if needed shall be made only at common splice points and placed in a wire splice box. The location of these wire splice boxes shall be made waterproof using 3M Scotchlok connectors.

D. At control wire splices, the Contractor shall provide a 36" wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires.

E. All continual wire shall be one color and in no case shall wires of different colors be spliced together.

F. All 24 volt wiring shall be installed in pvc conduit when inside a building. All 24 volt wiring installed on exterior building walls shall be installed in metal conduit.

3.14 120 VOLT CONTROLLER POWER WIRING

A.

328400 - 8

The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the work required to complete this portion of the installation. All 120 volt wiring shall be installed in accordance with local electrical codes. The 120 volt service shall consist of one (1) black and one (1) white wire. The neutral wire shall be bonded.

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


B. 120 volt power shall be supplied to the Controller location by a licensed electrician.

3.l5 MANUAL DRAIN VALVES

Manual drain valves shall be of the size and type as indicated and at the locations appropriate to the design.

3.16 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be tested for a one hour period at 100 psi, unless otherwise noted. Prior to testing, the mainline shall be partially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit air pressure to be applied to the main. A pressure of 100 psi must be retained for a one hour period. Any leaks resulting in the one hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

B. Upon completion of the lateral piping sections, each lateral system shall be pressure tested for one hour at 100 psi. On systems using flex nipples, or swing joints, the lateral system shall be tested prior to installation of the flex nipples or swing joints. Prior to testing the lateral lines shall be partially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All air and dirt shall be flushed from the system and all open fittings shall be capped. The testing procedure shall be the same as used for the main line. If after one hour no visual leakage has occurred and the 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

3.l7 ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM

After completion of testing and installation, the Contractor shall adjust all valves for the proper operating pressure and adjust all sprinklers and bubblers for uniform coverage and even flow. Contractor shall wire the Controller (valve/station) as directed by the design and manufacturer's recommendations. The valve number will be indicated on the Controller panel for each station. Contractor will program Controller to provide optimum sprinkler system performance.

3.l8 IRRIGATION AUDIT

If the landscape being watered by the irrigation system has a turf area of one or more acres, the Contractor must have a Landscape Irrigation Audit performed as required by the City of Albuquerque Water Conservation Landscaping and Water Waste Ordinance. The audit must be performed prior to the installation of turf or seed. The system must be adjusted to meet the required minimum efficiency requirements prior to installation of the turf or seed.

3.l9 CLEAN UP

The Contractor shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in which he is installing they system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting from the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the Contractor shall remove from the Owner's property at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish waste material, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the installation of the system.

3.20 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES



3.21 ROCK

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any damage to these existing utilities and improvements. In the event that such damage should occur from his operations, the Contractor shall repair or replace damaged utilities to their original condition at no additional expense to the OWler.

If the Contractor encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this purpose shall be brought in at the expenses of the Contractor. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operation.

3.22 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. When the Contractor is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is balanced and adjusted, that all work and clean-up is completed he shall issue notice of completion to the Architect requesting a final inspection. The Architect will respond to the notice of completion by the Contractor and shall appear with the Owner's representative for an inspection of the project. At that time the Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of each system in its entirety.

B. Any work deemed not acceptable shall be re-worked to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.

C. When the completed work and the "RECORD" drawings, certification of backflow inspection, keys and maintenance manual have been reviewed and approved by the Architect and the Owner, a written acceptance of the project signed by both the Architect and the Owner will be given to the Contractor.

3.23 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTION

A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner or his representative in the operation and maintenance of the system. .

B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two (2) keys for the following:

1. Manual Gate Valves. 2. Manual Drain Valves. 3. Valve Boxes. 4. Valve Markers. 5. Controllers. 6. Any locking assembly in need of key access.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of a Maintenance Manual bound in a three ring binder. The maintenance manual shall include copies of the approval Submittals, Controller operations manuals and manufacturers warranties on all irrigation products.

3.24 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE

A.

328400 - 10

For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor will promptly furnish and install, without cost to Owner, any and all parts or materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to irrigation system line

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


breaks shall be repaired and brought to original condition by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

B. In the fall, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will drain the system, and otherwise prepare the system for winter. In the spring, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will reactivate the system, repair any defects or damage and adjust the system. As these services are performed, the Contractor will instmct the Owner.

C. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall repair any settlement of trenches by one of the following methods as directed by the Owner.

1. Bring to grade by top-dressing (raking topsoil into the grass). 2. Bring to grade with topsoil and seed. 3. Remove existing sod, fill depression with topsoil, and replace with new sod to match

existing sod. 4. Repair by any of the above methods must result in a smooth, level area. Maintenance of

repaired areas shall be the responsibility of the Owner.

3.25 INSPECTION

The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the Owner or Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notifY the Architect, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. The Contractor shall not proceed with work of the next sequence without written approval of the work of previous sequence. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the written inspection approvals to all applications for payment.

1. Inspect staked locations of mainline, valves, laterals and sprinkler heads. 2. Inspect and pressure test mainline installation. 3. Inspect 24 volt control wire installation. 4. Inspect and pressure test automatic valves and lateral il1'igation installation. 5. Inspect automatic controller installation and operation. 6. Inspect sprinkler and bubbler head placement, coverage and operating pressure prior to

planting. 7. Inspect at end of maintenance period.

END OF SECTION

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 328400·11


328400 -12 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


SECTION 32 8405

RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

The terms "Contractor" and "Provider" are used interchangeably throughout this specification.

The work consists of installing a complete underground sprinkler Rain Water Harvesting system for irrigation of plants shown on the Drawings and as specified hereafter.

This is a complete Design / Build System provided and installed by the Contractor / Provider. Contractor will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning of the complete and functioning system.

The design and installation of the rainwater-harvesting irrigation system is to be fully integrated/coordinated with the conventional (municipal water supplied) irrigation system such that:

When adequate stored rainwater water is available fi'om the raiml'ater cisterns, that water will become that primmy water source for landscaping irrigation, until the available stored rainwater is exhausted;

When insufficient water is available ji'OIl1 the rainwater cisterns, the conventional system will be usedfor landscaping irrigation.

The system will be designed and installed such that the switchover between the two systems will be automatically determined and controlled through interconnected water-level sensors, pumps, valves, timers, etc., as necessmy to provide a singleflllly ... iI~tegrated irrigation system that incOlporates both the rainwater and municipal-water sources.

The Contractor performing this work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and permits necessary for design and completion of the system. The construction of the Rain Water Harvesting system shall include the furnishing, installing and testing of all components pertinent to the plans and specifications of this system. The Contractor shall perform all trenching, excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical work, welding, and any other work necessary for the completion of the project.


A Provider will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning ofthe complete and functioning system.


C Provider will be responsible for all required engineering drawings and other documentation required for all permits for construction of the system; Provider will be responsible for obtaining all corresponding permits, except for the site permit that encompasses the overall facility project.

D Provider will be responsible for all engineering drawings, documentation, and procedures

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 328400 ... 1


required by the utility to complete the interconnection, commissioning and start- up of the system. Provider will be responsible for all interconnection related costs.


F Provider's project team must be certified and/or licensed to by appropriate local jurisdiction to design and construct the system. At minimum, this includes NM licensed PE's (professional engineers) and valid contractor license.


H Provider shall furnish all materials, tools, labor and equipment required for the system completion at Provider's expense.





1.03 SUBMITTALS

Prepare and make five sets of submittals providing manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings indicating design, and "cut sheets" on all equipment as required.


A.

B.

328400 - 2

The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "record" drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes in the location of components from the original design and specifications as provided . All component locations shall be shown with actual measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the filed.

At the time of final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish a set of reproducible "record" drawings prepared by a qualified draftsperson showing the entire completed system as actually installed. This is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be construed to be the responsibility of any other party. This drawing shall be accurate and to scale. The symbols for components shall be described by a Legend. The legend shall also be modified to designate any "record" changes. The final drawings shall be dated and clearly labeled "RECORD DRAWING".

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type and shall be the best of their class and kind. All materials shall have a minimum guarantee of one year against material defects or defective workmanship.

B. The appendix to this specification section identifies products which are a basic design guide of components necessary for a complete and functioning system. Contractor / Provider shall be responsible for designing, providing, and installing products appropriate to the function of a complete system. This product list shall not be construed to be limited to required products or indidiual components. Contractor will be responsible for system engineering and design of products or components for a complete and functioning system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

This section includes installation specifications for all items installed as a part ofthe Rain Water Harvesting system. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to manufacturer's recommendations and specifications, local and state codes, and as specified herein.


The Contractor shall be responsible for correct procedures in loading, unloading, staking, transporting and handling all materials to be used in the system. The Contractor shall avoid rough handling which could affect the useful life of equipment. Components shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations on loading, unlpading and storage.


A. The Contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe and individual components prior to trenching.

B. Excavation and trenching for pipe lines and individual components shall be true and line with the trench banks and as nearly vertical as practical. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than necessary to permit proper joining, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other installation procedures that may be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal and vertical separation of 4" between pipes in the same trench.



E. Depth of Bury: Minimum cover over mainline and lateral piping shall be as required by Code and appropriate to the Design.





B. Caution shall be exercised by the Contractor in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be stored and transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lie flat without subjecting it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged or in any other way found to be defective, either before or after laying shall be replaced with sound pipe without additional expense to the Owner.


D. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be assembled to permit the pipe or fittings to be jointed at the true parallel position of the fittings. Placement of pipe in curving trenches which cause excessive bending and stress on pipe and fittings will not be permitted. No excess piping or fittings shall be permitted in the installation of the system, which may increase pressure loss or potential blockage.

E. Before installing the pipe, all rubbish and large rocks shall be removed from the trenches. If the soil is extremely rocky, the trenches shall be bedded with dirt or sand as outlined in other portions of these specifications. The full length of each section of the pipe shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells, joints and couplings.

F. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are \lnsuitable for the work. Any water which may be encountered or may accumulate in the trenches or excavation shall be pumped out or otherwise removed as necessary to keep the bottom of the trench or excavation free and clear of water during the progress of the work. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is 32° F or below.

G. PVC pipe will expand or contract at the rate of 1" per 1 00' per 10° F change of temperature. Therefore, the pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer.


I. After all sprinkler piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these specifications; the control valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed.

3.05 SOL VENT WELDING PROCEDURE


328400 - 4 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


B. Burrs left from cutting shall be wiped offwith a clean dry cloth.

C. Utilizing a cleaner/primer, thoroughly clean the mating pipe end and the fitting socket with a clean, dry cloth.

D. Apply a uniform coat of solvent cement to the outside of the pipe end with a non-synthetic brush 01' dauber.

E. In like manner, apply a thin coating of solvent cement to the inside of the fitting socket.

F. Re-apply a light coat of solvent cement to the pipe end and quickly insert it into the fitting to the full depth of the fitting socket.

G. Rotate the pipe 01' fitting approximately 1/4 turn to insure even distribution of the solvent cement.

H. Hold in position for approximately 30 seconds.

1. Wipe off any excess solvent cement that forms as a bead around the outer shoulder.

J. Care should be taken so as not to use an excess amount of solvent cement that could cause burrs or obstructions to form on the inside of the pipe joint.

K. Solvent weld joints shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.

3.06 BACKFILLING

A. Upon completion of a paJiicular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, paJiial backfilling can begin, leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection during the hydrostatic testing. Only upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test can the backfill operation be completed for anyone particular section.

B. Backfill material shall be free from rock, large stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage pipe during the backfilling operations.

C. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be unsuitable for use in backfill by the Architect, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of by the Contractor and at his own expense. The Contractor shall then, at no additional cost to the Owner, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials free of large clods of earth or sharp stones and capable of attaining the same relative density of the surrounding ground.

D. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6" below the normal trench depth to allow for 6" of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, there shall be at least 6" of padding on all sides of the pipe as a padding against the rock wall of the trench.

E. All mainline and lateral piping shall have irrigation line location tape installed in the trench six (6") inches above the pipe.




3.07 SADDLE TAPS

No saddle taps shall be pennitted.

3.08 THRUST BLOCKS

Concrete thrust block shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure. Thrust blocks shall be constructed at all direction changes, size changes, valves and terminations or at any other points of the system that will result in an unbalanced thrust line for equipment 2 liz" and larger. Do not obstruct the outlets of fittings which are intended for future connections. Thrust blocks shall be poured against undisturbed earth.


Unless otherwise noted on plans, all piping installed under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two (2) sizes larger than the pipe to be sleeved. Wiring shall be placed in a separate sleeve from that of the pipe crossing and shall be 1 114" Class 200 PVC. Ends at sleeves shall be sealed with duct tape following installation of wire or piping.

3.10 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be tested for a one hour period at 1 00 psi, unless otherwise noted. Prior to testing, the mainline shall be paIiially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit air pressure to be applied to the main. A pressure of 100 psi must be retained for a one hour period. Any leaks resulting in the one hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

B. Upon completion of the lateral piping sections, each lateral system shall be pressure tested for one hour at 100 psi. On systems using flex nipples, or swing joints, the' lateral system shall be tested prior to installation of the flex nipples or swing joints. Prior to testing the lateral lines shall be partially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All air and dirt shall be flushed from the system and all open fittings shall be capped. The testing procedure shall be the same as used for the main line. If after one hour no visual leakage has occurred and the 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

3.11 ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM

After completion of testing and installation, the Contractor shall adjust all all components to provide optimum performance.

3.12 CLEANUP

328400 - 6

The Contractor shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in which he is installing they system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting fi'om the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the Contractor shall remove from the Owner's property at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish waste material, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the installation of the system.

IRRIGATION SYSTEMS



3.14 ROCK

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any damage to these existing utilities and improvements. In the event that such damage should occur fi'om his operations, the Contractor shall repair or replace damaged utilities to their original condition at no additional expense to the Owner. .

If the Contractor encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this purpose shall be brought in at the expenses of the Contractor. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operation.


A. When the Contractor is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is balanced and adjusted, that all work and clean-up is completed he shall issue notice of completion to the Architect requesting a final inspection. The Architect will respond to the notice of completion by the Contractor and shall appear with the Owner's representative for an inspection of the project. At that time the Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of each system in its entirety.

B. Any W)rk deemed not acceptable shall be re-worked to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.

C. When the completed work and the "RECORD" drawings, celiification of backflow inspection, keys and maintenance manual have been reviewed and approved by the Architect and the Owner, a written acceptance of the project signed by both the Architect and the Owner will be given to the Contractor.


A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner or his representative in the operation and maintenance of the system.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two (2) keys for any locking assembly.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of a Maintenance Manual bound in a three ring binder. The maintenance manual shall include copies of the approval Submittals and manufacturers warranties on all products.


A. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor will promptly furnish and install, without cost to Owner, any and all parts or materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to Rain Harvesting system line breaks or component failures shall be repaired and brought to original condition by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

B. In the fall, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will drain the system, and otherwise prepare the system for winter. In the spring, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will reactivate the system, repair any defects or damage and adjust the system. As these services are performed, the Contractor will instruct the Owner.




1. Bring to grade by top- dressing (raking topsoil into the grass). 2. Bring to grade with topsoil and seed. 3. Remove existing sod, fill depression with topsoil, and replace with new sod to match



3.18 INSPECTION

328400 - 8

The Contractor shall be responsible for the minimum required inspections during the course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the Owner or Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notifY the Architect, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The Contractor shall not proceed with work of the nexi inspections without written approval of the work of previous inspections. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the written inspection approvals to all applications for payment

END OF SECTION

IRRIGA nON SYSTEMS

Rain rvest Systems

6075 Parkway North Drive Suite D Cumming, GA 30040

Part No. Description

5190-003403 RainMaster 3,400 Gallon In-Ground Rainwater Catchment System with External Filter and 1.25 hp Pump, which includes: 1- Graf Carat S 1700 Gallon tank with seal kit. 1- Carat S Maxi Dome with seal and accessory kit. 1- Mini Telescoping Shaft with lid. 1- Graf Carat S 1700 gallon Extension tank with seal kit. 1- Graf Optimax External Filter with Opticlean Spray Head. 1- Calmed Inlet. 1- Overflow Siphon. 1- 1-1/4" Floating pump extractor with hose 1- RainMaster 1.25 hp High Performance submersible pump. 1- RainMaster PC1l5A lI5v Pump Control. 4- 2" Bulkhead Fittings. 1- 1-1/4" Bulkhead Fitting. 1- 1-1/4" Hose Barb. 2- Stainless Steel Hose Clamps. 1- 2" Vent Cap with Mesh Screen. 3- 4" Multi-Tite Gaskets.

Note: Optimax External Filter may require 4" or 6" (or both) Fernco couplers for pipe connections to filter.

Rain Systems

6075 Parkway NOlih Drive Suite D Cumming, GA 30040

Part No. Description

351027 Graf Aqua Control+ System includes 10' Tank Sensor, Sensor Control Box and 24vac Transformer.

88501 Zum-Wilkins Model 375 1" reduced pressure principle assembly

8E066-002-1... Bonomi Motorized Brass 3 Way Valve, 24VAC, 1-114" connections (85LOOI03)

400626 RainMaster Float Switch with double pole operation and 30' cord.

Freight Estimated Shipping Charge, Subject to Change at Time of Purchase.


SECTION 32 8405


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

The tenus "Contractor" and "Provider" are used interchangeably throughout this specification.

The work consists of installing a complete underground sprinkler Rain Water Harvesting system for irrigation of plants shown on the Drawings and as specified hereafter.

This is a complete Design / Build System provided and installed by the Contractor / Provider. Contractor will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning of the complete and functioning system.

The design and installation of the rainwater-hal1!esting irrigation system is to befully integratedlcoordinated with the conventional (municipal water supplied) irrigation system such that:

When adequate stored rainwater water is availablefi'om the raimvater cisterns, that water will become that primmy water source for landscaping irrigation, until the available stored rainwater is exhausted;

When insufficient water is available fi'om the rainwater cisterns, the conventional system will be usedfor landscaping irrigation.

The system will be designed and installed such that the switchover between the two systems will be automatically determined and controlled through interconnected water-level sensors, pumps, valves, timers, etc., as necessmy to provide a single filll~integrated irrigation system that incorporates both the rainwater and municipal-water sources.

The Contractor performing this work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials and permits necessary for design and completion of the system. The construction of the Rain Water Harvesting system shall include the furnishing, installing and testing of all components peliinent to the plans and specifications of this system. The Contractor shall perform all trenching, excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical work, welding, and any other work necessary for the completion of the project.


A Provider will be responsible for system engineering and design, procurement, supply, installation, interconnection and commissioning ofthe complete and functioning system.


C Provider will be responsible for all required engineering drawings and other documentation required for all permits for construction ofthe system; Provider will be responsible for obtaining all corresponding permits, except for the site permit that encompasses the overall facility proj ect.

D Provider will be responsible for all engineering drawings, documentation, and procedures

RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS 328405 ·1


required by the utility to complete the interconnection, commissioning and start-up of the system. Provider will be responsible for all interconnection related costs.


F Provider's project team must be celiified and/or licensed to by appropriate local jurisdiction to design and construct the system. At minimum, this includes NM licensed PE's (professional engineers) and valid contractor license.


H Provider shall furnish all materials, tools, labor and equipment required for the system completion at Provider's expense.





1.03 SUBMITTALS

Prepare and make five sets of submittals providing manufacturer's specifications, shop drawings indicating design, and "cut sheets" on all equipment as required.


A.

B.

328405 - 2

The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "record" drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes in the location of components from the original design and specifications as provided. All component locations shall be shown with actual measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the filed.

At the time of final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish a set of reproducible "record" drawings prepared by a qualified draftsperson showing the entire completed system as actually installed. This is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not be construed to be the responsibility of any other paIiy. This drawing shall be accurate and to scale. The symbols for components shall be described by a Legend. The legend shall also be modified to designate any "record" changes. The final drawings shall be dated and clearly labeled "RECORD DRAWING".



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type and shall be the best of their class and kind. All materials shall have a minimum guarantee of one year against material defects or defective workmanship.

B. The appendix to this specification section identifies products which are a basic design guide of components necessary for a complete and functioning system. Contractor / Provider shall be responsible for designing, providing, and installing products appropriate to the function of a complete system. This product list shall not be construed to be limited to required products or indidiual components. Contractor will be responsible for system engineering and design of products or components for a complete and functioning system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

This section includes installation specifications for all items installed as a part of the Rain Water Harvesting system. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to manufacturer's recommendations and specifications, local and state codes, and as specified herein.


The Contractor shall be responsible for correct procedures in loading, unloading, staking, transpOliing and handling all materials to be used in the system. The Contractor shall avoid rough handling which could affect the useful life of equipment. Components shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations on loading, unloading and storage.


A. The Contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe and individual components prior to trenching.

B. Excavation and trenching for pipe lines and individual components shall be tlUe and line with the trench banks and as nearly veliical as practical. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than necessary to permit proper joining, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other installation procedures that may be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal and vertical separation of 4" between pipes in the same trench.



E. Depth of Bury: Minimum cover over mainline and lateral piping shall be as required by Code and appropriate to the Design.

RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS 328405 -3




B. Caution shall be exercised by the Contractor in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be stored and transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lie flat without subjecting it to undue bending or concentrated ex1emal load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged or in any other way found to be defective, either before or after laying shall be replaced with sound pipe without additional expense to the Owner.


D. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be assembled to permit the pipe or fittings to be jointed at the true parallel position of the fittings. Placement of pipe in curving trenches which cause excessive bending and stress on pipe and fittings will not be permitted. No excess piping or fittings shall be permitted in the installation of the system, which may increase pressure loss or potential blockage.

E. Before installing the pipe, all rubbish and large rocks shall be removed from the trenches. If the soil is eX1remely rocky, the trenches shall be bedded with dirt or sand as outlined in other pOliions of these specifications. The full length of each section of the pipe shall rest solidly upon fue pipe bed, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells, joints and couplings.

F. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. Any water which may be encountered or may accumulate in the trenches or excavation shall be pumped out or otherwise removed as necessary to keep the bottom of the trench or excavation free and clear of water during the progress of the work. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is 32° F or below.

G. PVC pipe will expand or contract at the rate of 1" per 1 00' per 10° F change of temperature. Therefore, the pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer.


I. After all sprinkler piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and patiially backfilled as specified in other patis of these specifications, the control valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed.

3.05 SOLVENT WELDING PROCEDURE


328405 - 4 RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS


B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

/

K.

Burrs left from cutting shall be wiped offwith a clean dry cloth.

Utilizing a cleaner/primer, thoroughly clean the mating pipe end and the fitting socket with a clean, dry cloth.

Apply a uniform coat of solvent cement to the outside of the pipe end with a non-synthetic brush or dauber.

In like manner, apply a thin coating of solvent cement to the inside of the fitting socket.

Re-apply a light coat of solvent cement to the pipe end and quickly insert it into the fitting to the full depth of the fitting socket.

Rotate the pipe or fitting approximately 114 turn to insure even distribution of the solvent cement.

Hold in position for approximately 30 seconds.

Wipe off any excess solvent cement that forms as a bead around the outer shoulder.

Care should be taken so as not to use an excess amount of solvent cement that could cause burrs or obstructions to form on the inside of the pipe joint.

Solvent weld joints shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.

3.06 BACKFILLING

A. Upon completion of a particular section of the itTigation system, and after sufficient time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, patiial backfilling can begin, leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection dm'ing the hydrostatic testing. Only upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test can the backfill operation be completed for anyone particular section.

B. Backfill material shall be free fi'om rock, large stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage pipe during the backfilling operations.

C. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be unsuitable for use in backfill by the Architect, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of by the Contractor and at his own expense. The Contractor shall then, at no additional cost to the Owner, alTange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials free of large clods of earth or sharp stones and capable of attaining the same relative density of the sUITounding ground.

D. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6" below the normal trench depth to allow for 6" of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, there shall be at least 6" of padding on all sides of the pipe as a padding against the rock wall of the trench.

E. All mainline and lateral piping shall have in'igation line location tape installed in the trench six (6") inches above the pipe.


RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS 328405 ·5


3.07 SADDLE TAPS

No saddle taps shall be permitted.

3.08 THRUST BLOCKS

Concrete thrust block shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure. Thrust blocks shall be constructed at all direction changes, size changes, valves and telminations or at any other points of the system that will result in an unbalanced thmst line for equipment 2W' and larger. Do not obstmct the outlets of fittings which are intended for future connections. Thmst blocks shall be poured against undisturbed earth.


Unless otherwise noted on plans, all piping installed under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two (2) sizes larger than the pipe to be sleeved. Wiring shall be placed in a separate sleeve from that of the pipe crossing and shall be 1 114" Class 200 PVC. Ends at sleeves shall be sealed with duct tape following installation of wire or piping.

3.10 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be tested for a one hour period at 100 psi, unless otherwise noted. Prior to testing, the mainline shall be partially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and tempormy valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit air pressure to be applied to the main. A pressure of 100 psi must be retained for a one hour period. Any leaks resulting in the one hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

B. Upon completion of the lateral piping sections, each lateral system shall be pressure tested for one hour at 100 psi. On systems using flex nipples, or swing joints, tlie lateral system shall be tested prior to installation of the flex nipples or swing joints. Prior to testing the lateral lines shall be pmiially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All air and dirt shall be flushed from the system and all open fittings shall be capped. The testing procedure shall be the same as used for the main line. If after one hour no visual leakage has occurred and the 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test.

3.11 ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM

After completion of testing and installation, the Contractor shall adjust all all components to provide optimum performance.

3.12 CLEANUP

328405 - 6

The Contractor shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in which he is installing they system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting fi'om the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the Contractor shall remove from the Owner's property at his own expense, all tempormy structures, rubbish waste material, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the installation of the system.




3.14 ROCK

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the Contractor to prevent any damage to these existing utilities and improvements. In the event that such damage should occur from his operations, the Contractor shall repair or replace damaged utilities to their original condition at no additional expense to the Owner.

If the Contractor encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no additional compensation wiII be paid. When material from the excavation or trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this purpose shall be brought in at the expenses of the Contractor. It shall also be the Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfiII operation.


A. When the Contractor is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is balanced and adjusted, that all work and clean-up is completed he shall issue notice of completion to the Architect requesting a final inspection. The Architect wiII respond to the notice of completion by the Contractor and shall appear with the Owner's representative for an inspection of the project. At that time the Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of each system in its entirety.

B. Any oork deemed not acceptable shall be re-worked to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.

C. When the completed work and the "RECORD" drawings, certification of backflow inspection, keys and maintenance manual have been reviewed and approved by the Architect and the Owner, a written acceptance of the project signed by both the Architect and the Owner wiII be given to the Contractor.


A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the Contractor shall instruct the Owner or his representative in the operation and maintenance of the system.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two (2) keys for any locking assembly.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two copies of a Maintenance Manual bound in a 1hree ring binder. The maintenance manual shall include copies of the approval Submittals and manufacturers warranties on all products.


A. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the Contractor wiII promptly furnish and install, without cost to Owner, any and all parts or materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to Rain Harvesting system line breaks or component failures shall be repaired and brought to original condition by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

B. In the faIl, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will drain the system, and otherwise prepare the system for winter. In the spring, at the Owner's request, the Contractor will reactivate the system, repair any defects or damage and adjust the system. As these services are performed, the Contractor wiII instruct the Owner.

RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEMS 328405 -7



1. Bring to grade by top-dressing (raking topsoil into the grass). 2. Bring to grade with topsoil and seed. 3. Remove existing sod, fill depression with topsoil, and replace with new sod to match



3.18 INSPECTION

328405 - 8

The Contractor shall be responsible for the minimum required inspections during the course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the Owner or Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Architect, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The Contractor shall not proceed with work of the next inspections without written approval of the work of previous inspections. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the written inspection approvals to all applications for payment

END OF SECTION



SECTION 32 9200

LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Landscape Contractor will be required to comply with the drawings and specifications included as part of these Documents in performing a1\ landscape work for this Project. The General Contractor for this Project will be required to fu1\y cooperate and coordinate his work with the Landscape Contractor.

B. Work under this section consists of the planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers, including the furnishing of a1\ labor, equipment, and materials and performing all work in connection therewith in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

1.02 PLANT NAMES

The botanic and common names used for the plants ca1\ed for on the Drawings are genera1\y in conformity with the approved names given in Standardized Plant Names, 1980 Edition, published by The American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. The names of varieties not included therein are genera1\y in conformity with the names accepted in the nursery trade.

1.03 PLANT MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

Plant material substitutions sha1\ not be made without the written permission of the Landscape Architect. The use of materials differing in kind, quality or size from that specified will be a1\owed only after the Landscape Architect is convinced that a1\ means of obtaining the specified materials have been exhausted. At the time bids are submitted, the Contractor is assumed to have located the materials necessary to complete the job as specified. A1\ requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids.

PART2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIALS

A complete plant list, including quantities, sizes and other requirements is shown on the Drawings. In the event that discrepancies occur between quantities of plants indicated in the plant list and on the Drawings, the plant quantities indicated on the Drawings sha1\ govern.

2.02 PLANT MATERIAL QUALITY

Plant material quality, size and condition sha1\ be in accordance with American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1980, as published by the Committee on Horticultural Standards of the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., the Drawings, and the following requirements:

1.

LANDSCAPE PLANTING

All plants shall be typical of their species or variety. All plants shall have nOlmal, well developed branches and vigorous root systems. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous,

329200 -1


free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark, sunscale injuries, plant diseases, insect eggs, borers, and all other forms of infections.

2. Unless otherwise stated on Drawings or approved by Landscape Architect, all plants shall be nursery grown and shall be tagged with nurselY labels indicating species and variety.

3. Container grown plant material shall have been grown in its delivery container for not less than six (6) months, but for not more than two (2) years. Any rootbound material will not be accepted.

4. Balled and burl aped plant material shall have a solid ball of earth of minimum specified size and held in place securely by burlap and a stout twine or rope. Broken or loose balls will not be accepted.

5. Unless specifically noted on the Drawings, all trees shall have a single trunk that is straight and free of "dog legs", "crooks", "Y-crotches", or other disfiguring shapes. The central leader of all trees shall not have been pruned. Trees with double leaders are not acceptable.

6. All plant material shall have a uniform shape around its complete circumference. Plant material with irregular branching patterns or with branching patterns more highly developed on one side than on other sides shall not be accepted.

7. The Landscape Architect shall inspect all plant material at the Contractor's yard prior to delivery to the job site. All material shall then be inspected at the job site prior to planting and after planting.

8. At the option of the Contractor, the Landscape Architect will inspect plant material at a wholesale nursery of the Contractor's choice prior to delivery of materials to the Contractor's yard. However, at no additional expense to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all travel expenses incuned by the Landscape Architect for any travel outside of the Albuquerque metropolitan area.

9. The Landscape Architect shall be the judge of the quality and acceptability of all plant material. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.03 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE

329200 - 2

Planting Soil Mixture to be a mixture of one part backfill amendment to three parts existing soil. The backfill amendment shall consist of: .

1. 70% by volume, organic compost. Compost to be screened to 112" minus, pH not to exceed 7.0. Electrical conductivity (EC) of compost not to exceed 3.5 mnhos!cm. Percentage of organic matter shall be not less than 80%, tested by simple combustion. Total nitrogen (TKN+N03-N) shall be not less than 1%, by weight. Carbon to nitrogen ratio of compost shall not exceed 50: 1.

2. 20%, by volume, "Moisture-lite" screened to pass a #40 mesh. 3. 10%, by volume, "Ecolite" screened to pass a #40 mesh. 4. Components to be homogeneously mixed, in ten cubic yard batches to provide a

uniform product, free fi'Om weed seeds, sticks, rocks, or other deleterious material. 5. The backfill amendment shall be as produced by:

6.

or equal.

WAPCO RR9, Box 862 2nd and Bates Rd., S.W. Albuquerque, New Mexico 87105 (505) 877-8670

Each Delivery shall have a load ticket. The load ticket shall list:

LANDSCAPE PLANTING


2.04 MULCH:

Source of Mixture Approximate volume ofload. Date of delivery or loading. Name of individual representing the source.

Ticket shall be collected and provided to the Owner's Representative.

Bark mulch shall be fresh, shredded mixture of 112" - 5" pieces of wood, cambium and bark nuggets from coniferous trees, as available from Western Agricultural Products Company.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLANTING OPERATIONS

A. Planting operations as specified herein shall begin only when other work including placing of topsoil to finished grade has progressed sufficiently to permit planting and shall be performed only during favorable weather conditions in accordance with accepted practice.

B. In anyone day, only those plant materials intended to be planted that day shall be delivered to the project site. Unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect, all plant materials shall be located where shown on the plan except when adjustments due to field conditions are required. The location of all trees and shrubs shall be staked by the Contractor before making any excavations, and locations shall be inspected by the Landscape Architect prior to installation. Tree locations shall be represented by using 1" x 2" x 12" wood stakes. The name of the tree shall be indicated on the stake so it is readily identified. Shrub locations shall be determined by placement of containerized plant material.

3.02 PLANTING

All planting and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with accepted nursery practice, the Drawings, and the following requirements:

1. The Contractor shall take care when backfilling planters to provide adequate compaction of the fill material in order to prevent settling.

2. Prepare all planting pits and install plants as shown on Drawings. Plants shall be set plumb and straight unless Drawings indicate otherwise.

3. Backfill for planting pits shall consist of the specified Planting Soil Mixture. The plant shall be positioned in the hole, and backfilled. The backfilling shall be completed, and material tamped. When pit is nearly filled, water thoroughly and allow water to soak away. If settling of backfill occurs after watering, add more backfill to bring to finish grade.

4. After completion of planting, all trees shall be pruned at the direction of the Owner.

3.03 MULCHING

Mulching shall be completed as indicated on the Drawings.

3.04 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION

LANDSCAPE PLANTING 329200 ·3


Maintenance and protection of trees, shrubs, and ground cover shall begin immediately following the last operation of installation for each plant and shall continue through the duration of the maintenance period, a minimum of thirty (30) days, or until the entire landscape project is accepted. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, removal and replacement of dead plant material, removal of debris, resetting of trees to upright positions, restoration of earth basins, and such other operations as may be necessary for the health of the planted stock and the general appearance of the landscaped areas. Care shall include protection of planted stock from damages resulting from trespass, erosion (including watering), weather, vandalism, disease and other hazards.

3.05 GUARANTEE

All plant materials shall be guaranteed to be in a live, healthy, and nonnal growing condition following the date of final acceptance by the Landscape Architect through one twelve month growing season. Plant materials that are dead or in an unhealthy, impaired growth condition, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. Replacement material shall be of equal quality, size, and species as that which is being replaced and shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to planting. Any plants replaced after the first six months of the guarantee period shall also be under warranty for six months after the replanting date.

3.06 INSPECTIONS

A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the Owner or Landscape Architect.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notifY the Landscape Architect, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection.

C. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work of the next sequence without written approval of the work of the previous sequence. The Contractor shall attach a copy of the written inspection approvals to all applications for payment. Payment will not be approved for items which have not been inspected and approved in writing.

1. Inspect plant material at Contractor's yard prior to delivery to job site. 2. Inspect staked locations of material prior to planting. 3. Inspection material at the job site prior to and during planting. 4. Inspect at end ono day maintenance period. 5. Inspect 6 months after [mal completion. 6. Inspection 12 months after final completion.

END OF SECTION

329200 - 4 LANDSCAPE PLANTING

Documents

~ I~~~~ltt~~~~~ Care...unless otherwise indicated; and A WS AS.S, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSDlO.12

~ Iltt~ Care...unless otherwise indicated; and A WS AS.S, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSDlO.12